Upgrade and Maintenance Manual - English

FUJITSU Server PRIMERGY RX2540 M1

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Edition June 2015

Comments… Suggestions… Corrections…
The User Documentation Department would like to
know your opinion of this manual. Your feedback helps
us optimize our documentation to suit your individual
needs.
Feel free to send us your comments by e-mail to
[email protected].

Certified documentation
according to DIN EN ISO 9001:2008
To ensure a consistently high quality standard and
user-friendliness, this documentation was created to
meet the regulations of a quality management system
which complies with the requirements of the standard
DIN EN ISO 9001:2008.
cognitas. Gesellschaft für Technik-Dokumentation mbH
www.cognitas.de

Copyright and Trademarks

Copyright © 2015 Fujitsu Technology Solutions GmbH.

All rights reserved.

Delivery subject to availability; right of technical modifications reserved.

All hardware and software names used are trademarks of their respective manufacturers.
– The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice.
– Fujitsu assumes no liability for damages to third party copyrights or other rights arising from
the use of any information in this manual.
– No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission
of Fujitsu.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, and Hyper V are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.

Intel and Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries
in the USA and other countries.
Before reading this manual

For your safety

This manual contains important information for safely and correctly using this
product.
Carefully read the manual before using this product. Pay particular attention to
the accompanying manual "Safety Notes and Regulations" and ensure these
safety notes are understood before using the product. Keep this manual and the
manual "Safety Notes and Regulations" in a safe place for easy reference while
using this product.

Radio interference
This product is a "Class A" ITE (Information Technology Equipment). In a
domestic environment this product may cause radio interference, in which case
the user may be required to take appropriate measures. VCCI-A

Aluminum electrolytic capacitors

The aluminum electrolytic capacitors used in the product's printed circuit board
assemblies and in the mouse and keyboard are limited-life components. Use of
these components beyond their operating life may result in electrolyte leakage
or depletion, potentially causing emission of foul odor or smoke.
As a guideline, in a normal office environment (25°C) operating life is not
expected to be reached within the maintenance support period (5 years).
However, operating life may be reached more quickly if, for example, the
product is used in a hot environment. The customer shall bear the cost of
replacing replaceable components which have exceeded their operating life.
Note that these are only guidelines, and do not constitute a guarantee of
trouble-free operation during the maintenance support period.

High safety use

This product has been designed and manufactured to be used in commercial
and/or industrial areas as a server.
When used as visual display workplace, it must not be placed in the direct field
of view to avoid incommoding reflections (applies only to TX server systems).
The device has not been designed or manufactured for uses which demand an
extremely high level of safety and carry a direct and serious risk of life or body
if such safety cannot be assured.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

These uses include control of nuclear reactions in nuclear power plants,
automatic airplane flight control, air traffic control, traffic control in mass
transport systems, medical devices for life support, and missile guidance
control in weapons systems (hereafter, "high safety use"). Customers should
not use this product for high safety use unless measures are in place for
ensuring the level of safety demanded of such use. Please consult the sales
staff of Fujitsu if intending to use this product for high safety use.

Measures against momentary voltage drop

This product may be affected by a momentary voltage drop in the power supply
caused by lightning. To prevent a momentary voltage drop, use of an AC
uninterruptible power supply is recommended.
(This notice follows the guidelines of Voltage Dip Immunity of Personal
Computer issued by JEITA, the Japan Electronics and Information Technology
Industries Association.)

Technology controlled by the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade

Control Law of Japan
Documents produced by Fujitsu may contain technology controlled by the
Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law of Japan. Documents which
contain such technology should not be exported from Japan or transferred to
non-residents of Japan without first obtaining authorization in accordance with
the above law.

Harmonic Current Standards

This product conforms to harmonic current standard JIS C 61000-3-2.

Only for the Japanese market: About SATA hard disk drives
The SATA version of this server supports hard disk drives with SATA / BC-SATA
storage interfaces. Please note that the usage and operation conditions differ
depending on the type of hard disk drive used.
Please refer to the following internet address for further information on the
usage and operation conditions of each available type of hard disk drive:
(http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/)

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

Only for the Japanese market:
I Although described in this manual, some sections do not apply to the
Japanese market. These options and routines include:
– CSS (Customer Self Service)

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Version history

Issue number Reason for update

August 2014 Initial release
September 2014 Correction
December 2014 new: riser modules, 12x 3.5 HDD backplane, SATA
DOM, SD card
February 2015 2.5-inch version
June 2015 PCIe SSD SFF, SATA DOM, RDX, LTO; cabling

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

1.1 Notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

2 Before you start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

2.1 Classification of procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

2.1.1 Customer Replaceable Units (CRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.1.2 Upgrade and Repair Units (URU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.1.3 Field Replaceable Units (FRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.2 Average task duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.3 Tools you need at hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.4 Documents you need at hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

3 Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

3.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

3.2 ENERGY STAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.3 CE conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.4 FCC Class A Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.5 Environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

4 Basic hardware procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

4.1 Using diagnostics information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

4.1.1 Locating the defective server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.1.2 Determining the error class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.1.2.1 Global Error indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.1.2.2 Customer Self Service (CSS) indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.1.3 Locating the defective component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.1.3.1 Local diagnostic indicators on the front . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.2 Shutting down the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

4.3 Disconnecting power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

4.4 Getting access to the component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.4.1 Extending the server out of the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.4.2 Removing the server from the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.4.3 Opening the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.4.3.1 Removing the housing cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.4.3.2 Removing the air duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.5 Reassembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.5.1 Installing the air duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.5.2 Closing the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.5.2.1 Mounting the housing cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.5.3 Mounting the server in the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.5.3.1 Seating the server on the rack rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.5.3.2 Sliding the server into the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.6 Connecting the server to the power source . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.7 Switching on the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

5 Basic software procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

5.1 Starting the maintenance task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

5.1.1 Suspending BitLocker functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5.1.2 Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.1.2.1 Viewing boot watchdog settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.1.2.2 Configuring boot watchdog settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
5.1.3 Removing backup and optical disk media . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.1.4 Verifying and configuring the backup software solution . . . . . . 79
5.1.5 Note on server maintenance in a Multipath I/O environment . . . 80
5.1.6 Switching on the ID indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.2 Completing the maintenance task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5.2.1 Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC . . . . 83
5.2.1.1 Updating or recovering the system board BIOS . . . . . . . . 83
5.2.1.2 Updating or recovering the iRMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.2.2 Verifying system information backup / restore . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.2.3 Updating RAID controller firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.2.4 Enabling Option ROM scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.2.5 Verifying and configuring the backup software solution . . . . . . 90
5.2.6 Resetting the boot retry counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.2.6.1 Viewing the boot retry counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.2.6.2 Resetting the boot retry counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Contents

5.2.7 Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality . . . . . . . . . . 93

5.2.8 Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS . . . . . . . 93
5.2.9 Verifying the memory mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.2.10 Verifying the system time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.2.11 Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL) . . . . . . . 96
5.2.11.1 Viewing the SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.2.11.2 Clearing the SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.2.12 Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment . . . 97
5.2.13 Resuming BitLocker functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.2.14 Performing a RAID array rebuild . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.2.15 Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.2.15.1 Looking up MAC addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.2.15.2 Looking up WWN addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.2.16 Using the Chassis ID Prom Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.2.17 Configuring LAN teaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.2.17.1 After replacing / upgrading LAN controllers . . . . . . . . . 104
5.2.17.2 After replacing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.2.18 Switching off the ID indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.2.19 Performing a fan test after replacing a defective fan . . . . . . 105
5.2.20 Upgrading or replacing the processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

6 Power supply units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

6.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

6.1.1 Power supply unit configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.1.2 Assembly rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.1.3 Power supply unit slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.2 Installing hot-plug power supply units . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.2.2 Removing the dummy cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6.2.3 Installing a hot-plug power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6.3 Removing a hot-plug power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6.3.2 Removing a hot-plug power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.3.3 Installing a PSU dummy cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.4 Replacing a hot-plug power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.4.2 Removing the defective hot-plug power supply unit . . . . . . . 118

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

6.4.3 Installing the new hot-plug power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . 118

6.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

7 Hard disk drives / solid state drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

7.1 Basic procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

7.2 3.5-inch cage configurations HDD / SSD . . . . . . . . . . . 122
7.2.1 Mounting order for 3.5-inch HDDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
7.2.1.1 HDD mounting order for 4x 3.5-inch HDD configuration . . 123
7.2.1.2 HDD mounting order for 8x 3.5-inch HDD configurations . . 123
7.2.1.3 HDD mounting order for 12x 3.5-inch HDD configurations . 124
7.2.2 Installing 3.5-inch HDD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
7.2.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
7.2.2.2 Removing a 3.5-inch dummy module . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
7.2.2.3 Installing a 3.5-inch HDD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
7.2.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
7.2.3 Removing 3.5-inch HDD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
7.2.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
7.2.3.2 Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
7.2.3.3 Installing a 3.5-inch dummy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
7.2.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
7.2.4 Replacing a 3.5-inch HDD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
7.2.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
7.2.4.2 Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
7.2.4.3 Installing a 3.5-inch HDD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.2.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.2.5 2.5-inch HDDS / SSD in a 3.5-inch installation frame . . . . . 132
7.2.5.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.2.5.2 Installing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD into a 3.5-inch installation frame
132
7.2.5.3 Removing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD out of a 3.5-inch installation
frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
7.2.5.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.3 Replacing 3.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS/SATA backplanes . . . . 137
7.3.1 Replacing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplanes . . . . . . . . 137
7.3.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
7.3.1.2 Removing the 4x 3.5-inch SAS HDD backplane 1 . . . . . 138
7.3.1.3 Installing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 1 . . . . . . 140
7.3.1.4 Removing the 4x 3.5-inch SAS HDD backplane 2 . . . . . 143
7.3.1.5 Installing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 2 . . . . . . 144

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Contents

7.3.1.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

7.3.2 Upgrading SAS / SATA HDD backplane 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.3.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.3.2.2 Installing the 3.5-inch HDD backplane 2 . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.3.2.3 Connecting the SAS cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.3.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.3.3 Replacing the 12x 3.5-inch HDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7.3.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7.3.3.2 Removing the SAS expander board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.3.3.3 Removing the defective 12x 3.5-inch HDD backplane . . . . 151
7.3.3.4 Installing the new 12x 3.5-inch HDD backplane . . . . . . . 152
7.3.3.5 Installing the SAS expander board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
7.3.3.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
7.3.4 Replacing the SAS expander board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
7.3.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
7.3.4.2 Removing the expander holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
7.3.4.3 Removing the defective SAS expander board . . . . . . . . 157
7.3.4.4 Installing the new SAS expander board . . . . . . . . . . . 159
7.3.4.5 Installing the SAS expander board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
7.3.4.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
7.3.5 Replacing the connector card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
7.3.5.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
7.3.5.2 Removing the SAS expander board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
7.3.5.3 Removing the defective connector card . . . . . . . . . . . 161
7.3.5.4 Installing the new connector card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7.3.5.5 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7.4 2.5-inch HDD/SSD configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.4.1 Mounting order for 2.5-inch HDDs/SSDs . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.4.1.1 HDD mounting order for 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD configuration . .
163
7.4.1.2 HDD mounting order for 16x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD configuration .
164
7.4.1.3 HDD mounting order for 24x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD configuration .
165
7.4.1.4 HDD mounting order for additional 4x PCIe SSD SFFs accessible
from the front side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
7.4.1.5 HDD mounting order for 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSDs or PCIe
SSDs accessible from the rear side . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
7.4.2 Installing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
7.4.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
7.4.2.2 Removing a 2.5-inch dummy module . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

7.4.2.3 Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . 170

7.4.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
7.4.3 Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
7.4.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
7.4.3.2 Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . 173
7.4.3.3 Installing a 2.5-inch dummy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
7.4.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
7.4.4 Replacing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
7.4.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
7.4.4.2 Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . 176
7.4.4.3 Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . 176
7.4.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
7.5 Replacing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS/SATA backplanes . . . . 177
7.5.1 Replacing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane 1 . . . . 177
7.5.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
7.5.1.2 Disconnecting cables from backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
7.5.1.3 Removing the backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
7.5.1.4 Installing the backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
7.5.1.5 Connecting cables to backplane 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
7.5.1.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
7.5.2 Replacing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane 2/3 . . . 183
7.5.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
7.5.2.2 Disconnecting cables from the backplane . . . . . . . . . . 183
7.5.2.3 Removing the backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
7.5.2.4 Installing the backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
7.5.2.5 Connecting cables to backplane 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
7.5.2.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
7.5.3 Upgrading the 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD (front side) . . . . . . . . 186
7.5.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
7.5.3.2 Installing the 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
7.5.3.3 Connecting cables to PCIe backplane . . . . . . . . . . . 188
7.5.3.4 Connecting cables to the PCIe switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
7.5.3.5 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
7.5.4 Replacing the 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
7.5.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
7.5.4.2 Removing cables from PCIe backplane . . . . . . . . . . . 191
7.5.4.3 Removing the 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
7.5.4.4 Installing the PCIe backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
7.5.4.5 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
7.5.5 Upgrading up to 24x 2.5-inch HDDs/SSDs . . . . . . . . . . . 193
7.5.5.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Contents

7.5.5.2 Installing the second/third SAS backplane . . . . . . . . . . 193

7.5.5.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
7.5.6 Replacing the SAS expander board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
7.5.6.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
7.5.6.2 Removing the expander holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
7.5.6.3 Removing the SAS expander board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
7.5.6.4 Installing the SAS expander board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
7.5.6.5 Installing the expander holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
7.5.6.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
7.6 Rear HDD/SSD or PCIe SSD extension box . . . . . . . . . 200
7.6.1 Replacing the backplane of the extension box . . . . . . . . . 200
7.6.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
7.6.1.2 Disconnecting cables from the rear backplane . . . . . . . 201
7.6.1.3 Removing the rear backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
7.6.1.4 Installing the rear backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
7.6.1.5 Connecting cables to the rear backplane . . . . . . . . . . 203
7.6.1.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
7.6.2 Upgrading a rear extension box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
7.6.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
7.6.2.2 Removing the rear air grid (left hand) . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
7.6.2.3 Installing the rear HDD cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
7.6.2.4 Installing the rear backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
7.6.2.5 Connecting cables to the rear backplane . . . . . . . . . . 209
7.6.2.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
7.6.3 Removing the rear extension box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
7.6.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
7.6.3.2 Disconnecting cables from the rear backplane . . . . . . . 211
7.6.3.3 Removing the rear HDD cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
7.6.3.4 Installing the rear air grid (left hand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
7.6.3.5 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

8 Expansion cards and backup units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

8.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

8.1.1 Expansion card overview and installation sequence . . . . . . 218
8.1.2 Using riser modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
8.1.2.1 Population rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
8.2 Handling slot brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
8.2.1 Installing a slot bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
8.2.1.1 Installing a standard slot bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

8.2.1.2 Installing a slot bracket to the Network adapter D2755 . . . 224

8.2.1.3 Installing a slot bracket to the USB 3.0 interface card D3305 . .
226
8.2.2 Removing a slot bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
8.3 Handling SFP+ transceiver modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
8.3.1 Installing SFP+ transceiver modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
8.3.2 Removing an SFP+ transceiver module . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
8.3.3 Replacing SFP+ transceiver modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
8.4 Standard expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
8.4.1 Installing expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
8.4.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
8.4.1.2 Removing the slot cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
8.4.1.3 Installing an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
8.4.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
8.4.2 Removing expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
8.4.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
8.4.2.2 Removing an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
8.4.2.3 Installing a PCI slot cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
8.4.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
8.4.3 Replacing expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
8.4.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
8.4.3.2 Removing an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
8.4.3.3 Installing an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
8.4.3.4 Connecting cables to the expansion card . . . . . . . . . . 241
8.4.3.5 Connecting a battery backup unit to the expansion card . . 241
8.4.3.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
8.5 Expansion cards in riser modules (HL) . . . . . . . . . . . 243
8.5.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
8.5.2 Installing an expansion card in riser module 1 (HL) . . . . . . . 244
8.5.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
8.5.2.2 Installing a riser card with 2 PCIe slots Gen3 x8 (HL) . . . . 245
8.5.2.3 Installing a PCIe expansion card in a riser module (HL) . . 246
8.5.2.4 Removing the slot cover (riser module 1) . . . . . . . . . . 247
8.5.2.5 Removing the rear air grid (riser module 1) . . . . . . . . . 248
8.5.2.6 Installing the riser module 1 (HL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
8.5.2.7 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
8.5.3 Removing riser module 1 (HL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
8.5.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
8.5.3.2 Removing the riser module 1 (HL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
8.5.3.3 Removing an expansion card (HL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
8.5.3.4 Installing the rear air grid (riser module 1) . . . . . . . . . 254

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Contents

8.5.3.5 Installing the slot cover (riser module 1) . . . . . . . . . . . 254

8.5.3.6 Insert the riser module 1 (HL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
8.5.3.7 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
8.5.4 Installing an expansion card in riser module 2 . . . . . . . . . . 255
8.5.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
8.5.4.2 Installing a riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
8.5.4.3 Installing an expansion card in a riser module . . . . . . . . 255
8.5.4.4 Installing the air grid extension to riser module 2 (HL) . . . . 256
8.5.4.5 Removing the rear air grid (riser module 2) . . . . . . . . . 256
8.5.4.6 Removing the slot cover (riser module 2) . . . . . . . . . . 257
8.5.4.7 Installing the riser module 2 (HL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
8.5.4.8 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
8.5.5 Removing riser module 2 (HL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
8.5.5.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
8.5.5.2 Removing the riser module 2 (HL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
8.5.5.3 Removing the air grid extension from riser module 2 (HL) . . 261
8.5.5.4 Removing an expansion card (HL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
8.5.5.5 Installing the slot cover (riser module 2) . . . . . . . . . . . 262
8.5.5.6 Installing the rear air grid (riser module 2) . . . . . . . . . . 263
8.5.5.7 Insert the riser module 2 (HL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
8.5.5.8 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
8.5.6 Replacing expansion cards in riser modules . . . . . . . . . . 264
8.5.6.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
8.5.6.2 Removing the defective expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . 264
8.5.6.3 Installing the new expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
8.5.6.4 Connecting cables to the expansion card . . . . . . . . . . 265
8.5.6.5 Connecting a battery backup unit to the expansion card . . . 265
8.5.6.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
8.5.7 Replacing a riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
8.5.7.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
8.5.7.2 Removing the defective riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
8.5.7.3 Installing the new riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
8.5.7.4 Connecting cables to the expansion card . . . . . . . . . . 267
8.5.7.5 Connecting a battery backup unit to the expansion card . . . 268
8.5.7.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
8.6 GPGPU cards in riser modules (FL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
8.6.1 Installing a GPGPU card in riser module 1 (FL) . . . . . . . . . 269
8.6.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
8.6.1.2 Removing the slot cover from the riser card holder . . . . . 270
8.6.1.3 Installing a riser card with one PCIe slot Gen3 x16 (FL) . . . 271
8.6.1.4 Installing a GPGPU card in a riser module (FL) . . . . . . . 272

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

8.6.1.5 Replacing the heat sink (FL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

8.6.1.6 Removing the slot cover (riser module 1) . . . . . . . . . . 272
8.6.1.7 Removing the rear air grid (riser module 1) . . . . . . . . . 273
8.6.1.8 Installing the riser module 1 (FL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
8.6.1.9 Installing the FBU on the riser card holder . . . . . . . . . 275
8.6.1.10 Installing the system air duct riser module 1 . . . . . . . . 277
8.6.1.11 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
8.6.2 Removing riser module 1 (FL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
8.6.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
8.6.2.2 Removing the FBU with the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
8.6.2.3 Removing the riser module 1 (FL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
8.6.2.4 Removing a GPGPU card (FL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
8.6.2.5 Installing the rear air grid (riser module 1) . . . . . . . . . 282
8.6.2.6 Installing the slot cover (riser module 1) . . . . . . . . . . 282
8.6.2.7 Insert the riser module 1 (HL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
8.6.2.8 Installing the system air duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
8.6.2.9 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
8.6.3 Installing a GPGPU card in riser module 2 . . . . . . . . . . . 283
8.6.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
8.6.3.2 Removing the slot cover from the riser card holder . . . . . 284
8.6.3.3 Installing a riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
8.6.3.4 Installing a GPGPU card in a riser module . . . . . . . . . 284
8.6.3.5 Installing the air grid extension to riser module 2 (FL) . . . 284
8.6.3.6 Replacing the heat sink (FL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
8.6.3.7 Removing the rear air grid (riser module 2) . . . . . . . . . 285
8.6.3.8 Removing the slot cover (riser module 2) . . . . . . . . . . 285
8.6.3.9 Installing the riser module 2 (FL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
8.6.3.10 Installing the FBU (riser module 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
8.6.3.11 Installing the system air duct riser module 2 . . . . . . . . 288
8.6.3.12 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
8.6.4 Removing riser module 2 (FL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
8.6.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
8.6.4.2 Removing the FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
8.6.4.3 Removing the riser module 2 (FL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
8.6.4.4 Removing the air grid extension from riser module 2 (FL) . 292
8.6.4.5 Removing a GPGPU card (FL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
8.6.4.6 Installing the slot cover (riser module 2) . . . . . . . . . . 292
8.6.4.7 Installing the rear air grid (riser module 2) . . . . . . . . . 292
8.6.4.8 Insert the riser module 2 (FL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
8.6.4.9 Installing the system air duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
8.6.4.10 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
8.6.5 Replacing GPGPU cards in riser modules . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Contents

8.6.5.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

8.6.5.2 Removing the defective GPGPU card . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
8.6.5.3 Installing the new GPGPU card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
8.6.5.4 Connecting cables to the GPGPU card . . . . . . . . . . . 294
8.6.5.5 Connecting a battery backup unit to the expansion card . . . 294
8.6.5.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
8.6.6 Replacing a riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
8.6.6.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
8.6.6.2 Removing the defective GPGPU card . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
8.6.6.3 Installing the new GPGPU card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
8.6.6.4 Connecting cables to the expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . 296
8.6.6.5 Connecting a battery backup unit to the expansion card . . . 297
8.6.6.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
8.7 Backup Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
8.7.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
8.7.2 Installing a FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
8.7.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
8.7.2.2 Installing TFM to the RAID controller (if applicable) . . . . . 299
8.7.2.3 Preparing the FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
8.7.2.4 Connecting the FBU to the RAID controller . . . . . . . . . 302
8.7.2.5 Installing the FBU holder onto the air duct . . . . . . . . . . 303
8.7.2.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
8.7.3 Removing a FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
8.7.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
8.7.3.2 Removing the FBU holder from the air duct . . . . . . . . . 306
8.7.3.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
8.7.4 Replacing a FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
8.7.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
8.7.4.2 Removing a FBU from the air duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
8.7.4.3 Disconnecting the FBU cable from the FBU . . . . . . . . . 309
8.7.4.4 Removing the FBU from the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
8.7.4.5 Installing a new FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
8.7.4.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
8.8 DynamicLoM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8.8.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8.8.1.1 PLAN EM 2x 1GB T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
8.8.1.2 PLAN EM 4x 1GB T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
8.8.1.3 PLAN EM 2x 10 GB SFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
8.8.1.4 PLAN EM 2x 10 GB T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
8.8.2 Installing the DynamicLoM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
8.8.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

8.8.2.2 Removing the slot cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

8.8.2.3 Installing the DynamicLoM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
8.8.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
8.8.3 Removing the DynamicLoM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
8.8.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
8.8.3.2 Removing the DynamicLoM module . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
8.8.3.3 Installing the slot cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
8.8.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
8.8.4 Replacing the DynamicLoM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
8.8.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
8.8.4.2 Removing the DynamicLoM module . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
8.8.4.3 Installing the DynamicLoM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
8.8.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
8.9 External COM1 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
8.9.1 Installing the external COM1 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
8.9.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
8.9.1.2 Breaking off the COM1 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
8.9.1.3 Installing the COM1 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
8.9.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
8.9.2 Removing the external COM1 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
8.9.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
8.9.2.2 Removing the COM1 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
8.9.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
8.9.3 Replacing the external COM1 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
8.9.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
8.9.3.2 Removing the external COM1 connector . . . . . . . . . . 331
8.9.3.3 Installing the external COM1 connector . . . . . . . . . . . 331
8.9.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

9 Main memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

9.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

9.1.1 Memory sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
9.1.1.1 Population rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
9.1.1.2 Independant Channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
9.1.1.3 Mirrored and performance modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
9.1.1.4 Rank Sparing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
9.2 Installing memory modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
9.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
9.2.2 Installing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Contents

9.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

9.3 Removing memory modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
9.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
9.3.2 Removing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
9.3.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
9.4 Replacing memory modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
9.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
9.4.2 Removing the defective memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
9.4.3 Installing a new memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
9.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

10 Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

10.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

10.1.1 Supported processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
10.1.2 Processor locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
10.2 Installing processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
10.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
10.2.2 Installing the processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
10.2.2.1 Opening the load plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
10.2.2.2 Installing the new processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
10.2.2.3 Closing the load plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
10.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
10.3 Removing processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
10.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
10.3.2 Removing a processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
10.3.2.1 Opening the load plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
10.3.2.2 Closing the load plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
10.3.2.3 Installing the protective cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
10.3.2.4 Closing the load plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
10.3.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
10.4 Upgrading or replacing processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
10.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
10.4.2 Upgrading or replacing a processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
10.4.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
10.5 Handling processor heat sinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
10.5.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
10.5.2 Installing processor heat sinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

10.5.2.1 Preparing the heat sink and processor . . . . . . . . . . . 371

10.5.2.2 Installing the heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
10.5.3 Removing processor heat sinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
10.5.4 Replacing processor heat sinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
10.5.4.1 Removing the processor heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
10.5.4.2 Applying thermal paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
10.5.4.3 Installing the processor heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
10.5.5 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
10.6 Applying thermal paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

11 System fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

11.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

11.2 Replacing the system fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
11.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
11.2.2 Removing a system fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
11.2.3 Installing a system fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
11.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
11.3 Removing the fan box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
11.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
11.3.2 Removing the fan box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
11.3.3 Installing the fan box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
11.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

12 Accessible drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

12.1 Basic informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

12.2 Optical disk drive (ODD) for 3.5-inch version . . . . . . . . 389
12.2.1 Installing the optical disk drive (ODD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
12.2.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
12.2.1.2 Removing the ODD dummy cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
12.2.1.3 Installing an ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
12.2.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
12.2.2 Removing the optical disc drive (ODD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
12.2.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
12.2.2.2 Removing the ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
12.2.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
12.2.3 Replacing an optical disc drive (ODD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
12.2.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Contents

12.2.3.2 Removing the defective ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

12.2.3.3 Installing the new ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
12.2.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
12.3 Optical disk drive (ODD) for 2.5-inch version . . . . . . . . 401
12.3.1 Installing the optical disk drive (ODD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
12.3.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
12.3.1.2 Removing the ODD dummy cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
12.3.1.3 Installing an ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
12.3.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
12.3.2 Removing the optical disc drive (ODD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
12.3.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
12.3.2.2 Removing the ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
12.3.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
12.3.3 Replacing an optical disc drive (ODD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
12.3.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
12.3.3.2 Removing the defective ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
12.3.3.3 Installing the new ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
12.3.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
12.4 LTO drive only for 2.5-inch version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
12.4.1 Installing the LTO drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
12.4.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
12.4.1.2 Removing the air grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
12.4.1.3 Installing an LTO drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
12.4.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
12.4.2 Removing the LTO drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
12.4.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
12.4.2.2 Removing the LTO drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
12.4.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
12.4.3 Replacing a LTO drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
12.4.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
12.4.3.2 Removing the defective LTO drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
12.4.3.3 Installing the new LTO drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
12.4.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
12.5 RDX drive only for 2.5-inch version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
12.5.1 Installing the RDX drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
12.5.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
12.5.1.2 Preparing an RDX drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
12.5.1.3 Installing the front panel cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
12.5.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
12.5.2 Removing the RDX drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
12.5.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

12.5.2.2 Removing the RDX drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

12.5.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
12.5.3 Replacing a RDX drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
12.5.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
12.5.3.2 Removing the defective RDX drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
12.5.3.3 Installing the new RDX drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
12.5.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

13 Front panel and external front connectors . . . . . . . . . 439

13.1 Front panel module 3.5-inch versions . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

13.1.1 Replacing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
13.1.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
13.1.1.2 Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
13.1.1.3 Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
13.1.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
13.2 Front panel board 3.5-inch versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
13.2.1 Replacing the front panel board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
13.2.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
13.2.1.2 Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
13.2.1.3 Removing the front panel board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
13.2.1.4 Installing the front panel board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
13.2.1.5 Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
13.2.1.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
13.3 Front VGA connector 3.5-inch versions . . . . . . . . . . . 452
13.3.1 Installing the front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
13.3.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
13.3.1.2 Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
13.3.1.3 Preparing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
13.3.1.4 Installing the front VGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
13.3.1.5 Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
13.3.1.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
13.3.2 Removing the front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
13.3.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
13.3.2.2 Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
13.3.2.3 Removing the front VGA cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
13.3.2.4 Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
13.3.2.5 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
13.3.3 Replacing the front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
13.3.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Contents

13.3.3.2 Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

13.3.3.3 Removing the front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
13.3.3.4 Installing the new front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . 458
13.3.3.5 Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
13.3.3.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
13.4 Front USB3.0 connector 3.5-inch versions . . . . . . . . . . 458
13.4.1 Installing the front USB3.0 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
13.4.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
13.4.1.2 Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
13.4.1.3 Preparing the front USB3.0 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
13.4.1.4 Installing the front USB3.0 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
13.4.1.5 Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
13.4.1.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
13.4.2 Removing the front USB3.0 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
13.4.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
13.4.2.2 Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
13.4.2.3 Removing the front USB3.0 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
13.4.2.4 Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
13.4.2.5 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
13.4.3 Replacing the front USB3.0 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
13.4.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
13.4.3.2 Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
13.4.3.3 Removing the front USB3.0 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
13.4.3.4 Installing the new front USB3.0 connector . . . . . . . . . . 463
13.4.3.5 Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
13.4.3.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
13.5 Front panel module 2.5-inch versions . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
13.5.1 Replacing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
13.5.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
13.5.1.2 Removing the front panel cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
13.5.1.3 Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
13.5.1.4 Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
13.5.1.5 Installing the front panel cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
13.5.1.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
13.6 Front panel board 2.5-inch versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
13.6.1 Replacing the front panel board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
13.6.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
13.6.1.2 Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
13.6.1.3 Removing the front panel board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
13.6.1.4 Installing the front panel board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
13.6.1.5 Installing front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

13.6.1.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

13.7 Front VGA connector 2.5-inch versions . . . . . . . . . . . 478
13.7.1 Installing the front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
13.7.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
13.7.1.2 Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
13.7.1.3 Preparing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
13.7.1.4 Installing the front VGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
13.7.1.5 Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
13.7.1.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
13.7.2 Removing the front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
13.7.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
13.7.2.2 Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
13.7.2.3 Removing the front VGA cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
13.7.2.4 Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
13.7.2.5 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
13.7.3 Replacing the front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
13.7.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
13.7.3.2 Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
13.7.3.3 Removing the front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
13.7.3.4 Installing the new front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . 484
13.7.3.5 Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
13.7.3.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
13.8 Front USB3.0 connector 2.5-inch versions . . . . . . . . . 484
13.8.1 Installing the front USB3.0 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
13.8.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
13.8.1.2 Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
13.8.1.3 Preparing the front USB3.0 connector . . . . . . . . . . . 485
13.8.1.4 Installing the front USB3.0 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
13.8.1.5 Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
13.8.1.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
13.8.2 Removing the front USB3.0 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
13.8.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
13.8.2.2 Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
13.8.2.3 Removing the front USB3.0 connector . . . . . . . . . . . 488
13.8.2.4 Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
13.8.2.5 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
13.8.3 Replacing the front USB3.0 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
13.8.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
13.8.3.2 Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
13.8.3.3 Removing the front USB3.0 connector . . . . . . . . . . . 489
13.8.3.4 Installing the new front USB3.0 connector . . . . . . . . . 489

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Contents

13.8.3.5 Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

13.8.3.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
13.9 Front panel module on rack mounting bracket . . . . . . . . 490
13.9.1 Replacing the front panel module on RMB . . . . . . . . . . . 490
13.9.1.1 Removing the front panel module from RMB . . . . . . . . 491
13.9.1.2 Installing the front panel module on RMB . . . . . . . . . . 492
13.9.1.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
13.9.2 Replacing the ID card holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
13.9.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
13.9.2.2 Removing the ID card holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
13.9.2.3 Installing the ID card holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
13.9.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

14 System board and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

14.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

14.2 Replacing the CMOS battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
14.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
14.2.2 Removing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
14.2.3 Installing the CMOS battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
14.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
14.3 USB Flash Module (UFM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
14.3.1 Installing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
14.3.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
14.3.1.2 Installing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
14.3.1.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
14.3.1.4 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
14.3.2 Removing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
14.3.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
14.3.2.2 Removing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
14.3.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
14.3.3 Replacing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
14.3.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
14.3.3.2 Removing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
14.3.3.3 Installing the new UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
14.3.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
14.3.3.5 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
14.4 Trusted Platform Module (TPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
14.4.1 Installing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

14.4.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

14.4.1.2 Installing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
14.4.1.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
14.4.2 Removing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
14.4.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
14.4.2.2 Removing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
14.4.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
14.4.3 Replacing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
14.4.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
14.4.3.2 Removing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
14.4.3.3 Re-installing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
14.4.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
14.5 SATA DOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
14.5.1 Installing the SATA DOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
14.5.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
14.5.1.2 Installing the SATA DOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
14.5.1.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
14.5.2 Removing the SATA DOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
14.5.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
14.5.2.2 Removing the SATA DOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
14.5.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
14.5.3 Replacing the SATA DOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
14.5.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
14.5.3.2 Replacing the SATA DOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
14.5.3.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
14.6 iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
14.6.1 Installing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
14.6.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
14.6.1.2 Installing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
14.6.1.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
14.6.2 Removing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
14.6.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
14.6.2.2 Removing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
14.6.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
14.6.3 Replacing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
14.6.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
14.6.3.2 Replacing the micro SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
14.6.3.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
14.7 Replacing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
14.7.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
14.7.2 Removing the defective system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Contents

14.7.3 Installing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

14.7.3.1 Mounting the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
14.7.3.2 Swapping processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
14.7.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

15 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

15.1 List of used cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

15.2 Cabling plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
15.2.1 3.5-inch variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
15.2.1.1 Configuration 4x 3.5-inch HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
15.2.1.2 Configuration 8x 3.5-inch HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
15.2.1.3 Configuration 12x 3.5-inch HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
15.2.2 2.5-inch variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
15.2.2.1 Configuration 8x 2.5-inch HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
15.2.2.2 Configuration 16x 2.5-inch HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
15.2.2.3 Configuration 24x 2.5-inch HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
15.2.2.4 Configuration 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD rear . . . . . . . . . . 559
15.2.2.5 Configuration 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSD rear . . . . . . . . 559
15.2.2.6 Configuration 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD front . . . . . . . . . . 560
15.2.2.7 Configuration 8x 2.5-inch HDD / 16x 2.5-inch HDD and LTO 4/5/6
drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
15.2.2.8 Configuration 8x 2.5-inch HDD / 16x 2.5-inch HDD and LTO 3
drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
15.2.2.9 Configuration 8x 2.5-inch HDD / 16x 2.5-inch HDD and USB 3.0
RDX drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

16 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

16.1 Mechanical overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

16.1.1 Server front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
16.1.1.1 3.5-inch HDD versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
16.1.1.2 2.5-inch HDD versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
16.1.2 Server rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
16.1.3 Server interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
16.2 Configuration tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
16.2.1 Hard disk drives / solid state drives mounting order . . . . . . . 569
16.2.2 Memory board configuration table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
16.2.3 Expansion card configuration table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 27

Contents

16.3 Connectors and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

16.3.1 Connectors and indicators on the system board . . . . . . . . 570
16.3.1.1 Onboard connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
16.3.1.2 Onboard indicators and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
16.3.2 Connectors and indicators on the I/O panel . . . . . . . . . . 574
16.3.2.1 I/O panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
16.3.2.2 I/O panel indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
16.3.3 Connectors and indicators on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . 578
16.3.3.1 Connectors on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
16.3.3.2 Front panel controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
16.4 Onboard settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
16.5 Minimum startup configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

1 Introduction
This Upgrade and Maintenance Manual provides instructions for the following
procedures:
● Upgrading the server configuration by adding optional hardware
components
● Upgrading the server configuration by replacing existing hardware
components with superior ones.
● Replacing defective hardware components
This manual focuses on on-site maintenance tasks. It is recommended to
prepare each service assignment following remote diagnostics procedures, as
described in the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual (see
section "Documents you need at hand" on page 42.
V CAUTION!
The document at hand comprises procedures of a wide range of
complexity. Check the profile of qualification for technicians before
assigning tasks. Before you start, carefully read "Classification of
procedures" on page 33.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 29

Introduction

1.1 Notational conventions

The following notational conventions are used in this manual:

Text in italics indicates commands or menu items

fixed font indicates system output
semi-bold fixed indicates text to be entered by the user
font
"Quotation marks" indicate names of chapters and terms that are being
emphasized
Ê describes activities that must be performed in the order
shown
[Abc] indicates keys on the keyboard
V CAUTION! Pay particular attention to texts marked with this symbol!
Failure to observe this warning may endanger your life,
destroy the system or lead to the loss of data.
I indicates additional information, notes and tips

indicates the procedure category in terms of complexity

and qualification requirements, see "Classification of
procedures" on page 33

indicates the average task duration, see "Average task

duration" on page 36

30 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

2 Before you start
Before you start any upgrade or maintenance task, please proceed as follows:
Ê Carefully read the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on
page 45.
Ê Make sure that all necessary manuals are available. Refer to the
documentation overview in section "Documents you need at hand" on
page 42. Print the PDF files if required.
Ê Make yourself familiar with the procedure categories introduced in section
"Classification of procedures" on page 33.
Ê Ensure that all required tools are available according to section "Tools you
need at hand" on page 37.
V CAUTION
In a system that has the Cool-safe® Advanced Thermal Design option,
only components that support the higher operating range may be
installed. Further information on this is available in the configurator.

The Cool-safe® Advanced Thermal Design option can

only be ordered from the manufacturer and is indicated
by the logo on the identification rating plate.

Installing optional components

The operating manual of your server gives an introduction to server features
and provides an overview of available hardware options.
Use the Fujitsu ServerView Suite management software and the iRMC web
frontend to prepare hardware expansions. ServerView Suite documentation is
available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
(http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/ for the Japanese market).
Please refer to the following ServerView Suite topics:
– Operation
– Virtualization
– Maintenance
– Out-Of-Band Management

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 31

Before you start

I For the latest information on hardware options, refer to your server’s

hardware configurator available online at the following address:
for the EMEA market:
http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/index.htm
for the Japanese market:
http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/system/
Please contact your local Fujitsu customer service partner for details on how to
order expansion kits or spare parts. Use the Fujitsu Illustrated Spares Catalog
to identify the required spare part and obtain technical data and order
information. Illustrated Spares catalogs are available online at
http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com/illustrated_spares (EMEA market only).

Replacing a defective component

The Global Error indicator on the front of the server reports defective hardware
components that need to be replaced. For further information on the controls
and indicators of your server, refer to the operating manual of your server and
section "Connectors and indicators" on page 570.
If the system has been powered off in order to replace a non-hot plug unit, a
system of PRIMERGY diagnostic indicators guides you to the defective
component. The "Indicate CSS" button enables the indicator next to the
defective component even if the server has been switched off and disconnected
from the mains. For further information, please refer to sections "Using
diagnostics information" on page 57 and "Connectors and indicators on the
front panel" on page 578.
If the defective component is a customer replaceable unit included in the CSS
concept (Customer Self Service, only available for EMEA market), the CSS
indicators on the front and rear side of the server will light up.
It is recommended to prepare local maintenance tasks using remote diagnostics
procedures, as described in the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept
(LSC)" manual.

32 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Before you start

2.1 Classification of procedures

The complexity of maintenance procedures varies significantly. Procedures
have been assigned to one of three unit categories, indicating the level of
difficulty and required qualification.
At the beginning of each procedure, the involved unit type is indicated by one of
the symbols introduced in this section.
I Please ask your local Fujitsu service center for more detailed
information.

2.1.1 Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)

Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)

Customer Replaceable Units are intended for customer self service and may be
installed or replaced as hot-plug components during operation.
I Components that the customer is entitled to replace may differ according
to the service form in his country.
Hot-plug components increase system availability and guarantee a high degree
of data integrity and fail-safe performance. Procedures can be carried out
without shutting down the server or going offline.

Components that are handled as Customer Replaceable Units

– Hot-plug power supply units
– Hot-plug fan modules
– Hot-plug HDD / SSD modules

Peripherals that are handled as Customer Replaceable Units

– Keyboard
– Mouse

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 33

Before you start

2.1.2 Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)

Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)

Upgrade and Repair Units are non hot-plug components that can be ordered
separately to be installed as options (Upgrade Units) or are available to the
customer through customer self service (Repair Units).
I Server management error messages and diagnostic indicators on the
front panel and system board will report defective Upgrade and Repair
Units as customer replaceable CSS components.
Upgrade and repair procedures involve shutting down and opening the server.
V CAUTION!
The device may be seriously damaged or cause damage if it is opened
without authorization or if repairs are attempted by unauthorized and
untrained personnel.

Components that are handled as Upgrade Units

– Processors (upgrade kits)
– Optical disk drives
– Expansion cards
– Battery backup units
– Memory modules
– Front VGA module

Components that are handled solely as Repair Units

– CMOS battery

34 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Before you start

2.1.3 Field Replaceable Units (FRU)

Field Replaceable Units (FRU)

Removing and installing Field Replaceable Units involves complex maintenance

procedures on integral server components. Procedures will require shutting
down, opening and disassembling the server.
V CAUTION!
Maintenance procedures involving Field Replaceable Units must be
performed exclusively by Fujitsu service personnel or technicians trained
by Fujitsu. Please note that unauthorized interference with the system
will void the warranty and exempt the manufacturer from all liability.

Components that are handled as Field Replaceable Units

– Processor (replacement)
– SAS / SATA backplanes
– Power distribution board
– Front panel module
– Management and diagnostics modules
– System board
– Standard power supply unit
– Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
– USB Flash Module (UFM)
I Please ask your local Fujitsu service center for more detailed
information.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 35

Before you start

2.2 Average task duration

Hardware: 10 minutes

The average task duration including preliminary and concluding steps is

indicated at the beginning of each procedure next to the procedure class.
Refer to table 1 on page 36 for an overview of steps taken into account for
calculating the average task duration:

Step included Explanation

Shutdown time depends on hardware and
software configuration and may vary
significantly.
Server shutdown no
Software tasks necessary before
maintenance are described in section
"Starting the maintenance task" on page 75.
Rack removal, Making the server available, removing the
yes
disassembly server from the rack (if applicable)
Transporting the server to the service table
Transport no (where required) depends on local
customer conditions.
Maintenance Maintenance procedures including
yes
procedures preliminary and concluding software tasks
Returning the server to its installation site
Transport no (where required) depends on local
customer conditions.
Assembly, Reassembling the server, installing the
yes
rack installation server in the rack (if applicable)
Booting time depends on hardware and
Starting up no software configuration and may vary
significantly.
Table 1: Calculation of the average task duration

36 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Before you start

2.3 Tools you need at hand

When preparing the maintenance task, ensure that all required tools are
available according to the overview below. You will find a list of required tools at
the beginning of each procedure.

Screw driver /
nut driver /
bit insert Screw Usage Screw type

torque
HDD
backplane,
Multibay and
Panelhousing Hexagonal cross
Phillips PZ2 Slot bracket
Nut 5 mm M3 x 4.5 mm
to chassis,
(silver)
0.6 Nm Slot bracket
to riser C26192-Y10-C67
Fan box
Riser card
Riser module
System Hexagonal cross
Phillips PZ2 board, Front
Nut 5 mm M3 x 6 mm
panel in 2.5-
(silver)
0.6 Nm inch HDD
version C26192-Y10-C68
Phillips PH1 3.5-inch HDD Cross
0.6 Nm 6-32 UNC x 4 mm
C26192-Y10-
C200
Cross
2.5-inch M3 x 3.5 mm
Phillips PH1 HDD/SSDs (silver)
0.4 Nm DynamicLoM
Front VGA C26192-Y10-
C102
Table 2: List of required tools and used screws

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 37

Before you start

Screw driver /
nut driver /
bit insert Screw Usage Screw type

torque
TPM bit insert
One-way head
Dedicated TPM
screw driver / REM 3 x 15 mm
TPM module TPM (black)
fixing tool (for the
C26192-Y10-
Japanese market)
C176
0.4 Nm
Slot bracket
Hexagonal cross
Phillips PH2 to controller
Nut 5 mm board M3 x 3.5 mm
Rack
0.4 Nm C26192-Y10-
mounting
C151
bracket
nylon screw cross
Phillips PH0 M3 x 3.5 mm
UFM
0.06 Nm (white)
A3C40109082
Cross
M3 x 5 mm
Phillips PH2 USB 3.0
(silver)
interface card
0.6 Nm slot bracket (contained in card
kit S26361-
D3305-A10)
Phillips PH0 TFM Cross
M2.5 x 4 mm
0.4 Nm
(silver)

Table 2: List of required tools and used screws

38 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Before you start

Screw driver /
nut driver /
bit insert Screw Usage Screw type

torque
Nut 5 mm VGA Hexagon bolt
4-40 UNC x
0.6 Nm COM1
10 mm (silver)
V26827-B408-
V989

Phillips PH1 ODD (3.5- Cross

inch HDD countersunk
0.4 Nm
version) M2 x 3 mm
(silver)
C26192-Y10-
C112
Phillips PH1 Front panel Cross
on rack
0.4 Nm EJOT PT 8 mm
mounting
(silver)
bracket
C26192-Y10-
C174
Phillips PZ2 Heat sink Hexagonal cross
Nut 6 mm Captive screw
(silver)
1 Nm
Nut 5 mm DynamicLoM Hexagon bolt
module
0.6 Nm M3 x 5 mm (silver)
D3245 and
D3255 C26192-Y1-C65

Nut 8 mm DynamicLoM Hexagon bolt

module
0.6 Nm M3 x 8mm (silver)
D3265 and
3275 C26192-Y1-C66

Table 2: List of required tools and used screws

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 39

Before you start

Screw driver /
nut driver /
bit insert Screw Usage Screw type

torque
Phillips PH1 DynamicLoM Cross
PCBA with
0.4 Nm M3 x 3.5 mm
metal slot
bracket C26192-Y10-
C102
Phillips PZ2 Front USB3.0 Hexagonal cross
Nut 5 mm
M3 x 4.5 mm
0.4 Nm! (silver)
C26192-Y10-C67

Phillips PZ2 Stabilizer bar Hexagonal cross

Nut 5 mm Captive screw
0.6 Nm M3 x 15 mm
(silver)

Cross
Phillips PH1 M3 x 4 mm
(silver)
0.4 Nm
A3C40142649

Phillips PZ2 Adapter rails Fillister head

on RDX drive screw
0.6 Nm
(4 screws in M3 x 5 mm
an adapter
set)

Phillips PH2 Tape drive Cross,counter

LTO sink
0.6 Nm
M3 x 6 mm (silver)
C26192-Y10-
C111
Table 2: List of required tools and used screws

40 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Before you start

Screw driver /
nut driver /
bit insert Screw Usage Screw type

torque
Phillips PH0 ODD latch Cross
M2 x 4 mm
0.2 Nm
C26192-Y10-
C166

Table 2: List of required tools and used screws

Tool Usage
Cut out in air duct for GPGPU
Side cutter
card installation
Combination pliers and flat nose pliers Destroy the UFM
Tooth pick CMOS battery
Flat screw driver
Flat nose pliers and thin slotted screw Remove the TPM
driver (2 x 0.4 mm)
Table 3: List of required tools

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 41

Before you start

2.4 Documents you need at hand

Maintenance procedures may include references to additional documentation.
When preparing the maintenance task, ensure that all required manuals are
available according to the overview below.
I– Ensure to store all printed manuals enclosed with your server in a
save place for future reference.
– Unless stated otherwise, all manuals are available online at
http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com under x86 servers.
For the Japanese market please use the following address:
http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/

Document Description
"Quick Start Hardware - FUJITSU
Quick installation poster for initial operation,
Server PRIMERGY RX2540 M1"
available online
leaflet
"ServerView Quick Start Guide"
Information on initial server setup and
"ServerView クイックスタート
software configuration, available online
ガイド " for the Japanese market
"Safety notes and regulations"
Important safety information, available
manual " 安全上のご注意 " for the
online or as a printed copy
Japanese market
"FUJITSU Server PRIMERGY
Available online
RX2540 M1" Operating Manual
"D3289 BIOS Setup Utility for
Information on configurable BIOS options
FUJITSU Server PRIMERGY
and parameters, available online
RX2540 M1" Reference Manual
Labels inside the housing cover outlining
System board and service labels
connectors, indicators and jumper
– "ServerView Suite Local Service
Concept (LSC)" user guide
– "ServerView Operations Manager -
Software documentation
Server Management" user guide
– "iRMC S4 Integrated Remote
Management Controller" user guide
Table 4: Documentation you need at hand

42 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Before you start

Document Description
Spare parts identification and information
system (EMEA market only), available for
online use or download (Windows OS) at
Illustrated Spares catalog
http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com/illustrated_spares
or from the CSS component view of the
ServerView Operations Manager
Glossary available online
"Warranty" manual Important information on warranty
regulations, recycling and service, available
"保証書" for the Japanese market online, or as a printed copy
"Returning used devices" manual
"Service Desk" leaflet Recycling and contact information,
available online, or as a printed copy
" サポー ト ＆サービ ス " for the
Japanese market
– "iRMC S4" user guide available online
– RAID documentation, available online at
http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com under x86
servers - Expansion Cards - Storage
Adapters
Additional documentation
For the Japanese market please use the
following address:
http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primer
gy/manual/
– Rack documentation
– Operating system documentation,
Third party documentation online help
– Peripherals documentation
Table 4: Documentation you need at hand

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 43

Before you start

44 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

3 Important information
V CAUTION!
Before installing and starting up a device, please observe the safety
instructions listed in the following section. This will help you to avoid
making serious errors that could impair your health, damage the device
and endanger the data base.
I Keep this manual and the other documentation (such as the technical
manual, documentation DVD) close to the device. All documentation
must be included if the equipment is passed on to a third party.

3.1 Safety instructions

I The following safety instructions are also provided in the manual "Safety
Notes and Regulations" or " 安全上のご注意 ".
This device meets the relevant safety regulations for IT equipment. If you have
any questions about whether you can install the server in the intended
environment, please contact your sales outlet or our customer service team.
● The actions described in this manual shall be performed by technical
specialists. A technical specialist is a person who is trained to install the
server including hardware and software.
● Repairs to the device that do not relate to CSS failures shall be performed
by service personnel. Please note that unauthorized interference with the
system will void the warranty and exempt the manufacturer from all liability.
● Any failure to observe the guidelines in this manual, and any improper
repairs could expose the user to risks (electric shock, energy hazards, fire
hazards) or damage the equipment.
● Before installing/removing internal options to/from the server, turn off the
server, all peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug
all power cords from the power outlet. Failure to do so can cause electric
shock or damage.

Before starting up
● During installation and before operating the device, observe the instructions
on environmental conditions for your device.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 45

Important information

● If the device is brought in from a cold environment, condensation may form

both inside and on the outside of the device.
Wait until the device has acclimatized to room temperature and is absolutely
dry before starting it up. Material damage may be caused to the device if this
requirement is not observed.
● Transport the device only in the original packaging or in packaging that
protects it from knocks and jolts.
For the Japanese market, transporting the device in its original packaging
does not apply.

Installation and operation

● This unit should not be operated in ambient temperatures above 35 °C. For
servers with Cool-safe® Advanced Thermal Design the ambient
temperature can increase to 40 °C.
● If the unit is integrated into an installation that draws power from an industrial
power supply network with an IEC309 connector, the power supply's fuse
protection must comply with the requirements for non-industrial power
supply networks for type A connectors.
● The unit automatically adjusts itself to a mains voltage in a range of 100 VAC
- 240 VAC. Ensure that the local mains voltage lies within these limits.
● This device must only be connected to properly grounded power outlets or
connected to the grounded rack internal power distribution system with
tested and approved power cords.
● Ensure that the device is connected to a properly grounded power outlet
close to the device.
● Ensure that the power sockets on the device and the properly grounded
power outlets are easily accessible.
● The On/Off button or the main power switch (if present) does not isolate the
device from the mains power supply. In case of repair or servicing
disconnect the device completely from the mains power supply, unplug all
power plugs from the properly grounded power outlets.
● Always connect the server and the attached peripherals to the same power
circuit. Otherwise you run the risk of losing data if, for example, the server is
still running but a peripheral device (e.g. memory subsystem) fails during a
power outage.
● Data cables must be adequately shielded.

46 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Important information

● Ethernet cabling has to comply with EN 50173 and EN 50174-1/2 standards

or ISO/IEC 11801 standard respectively. The minimum requirement is a
Category 5 shielded cable for 10/100 Ethernet, or a Category 5e cable for
Gigabit Ethernet.
● Route the cables in such a way that they do not create a potential hazard
(make sure no-one can trip over them) and that they cannot be damaged.
When connecting the server, refer to the relevant instructions in this manual.
● Never connect or disconnect data transmission lines during a storm (risk of
lightning hazard).
● Make sure that no objects (e.g. jewelry, paperclips etc.) or liquids can get
inside the server (risk of electric shock, short circuit).
● In emergencies (e.g. damaged casing, controls or cables, penetration of
liquids or foreign bodies), contact the system administrator or your customer
service team. Only disconnect the system from the mains power supply if
there is no risk of harming yourself.
● Proper operation of the system (in accordance with IEC 60950-1 resp.
EN 60950-1) is only ensured if the casing is completely assembled and the
rear covers for the installation slots have been fitted (electric shock, cooling,
fire protection, interference suppression).
● Only install system expansions that satisfy the requirements and rules
governing safety and electromagnetic compatibility and those relating to
telecommunication terminals. If you install other expansions, they may
damage the system or violate the safety regulations. Information on which
system expansions are approved for installation can be obtained from our
customer service center or your sales outlet.
● The components marked with a warning notice (e.g. lightning symbol) may
only be opened, removed or exchanged by authorized, qualified personnel.
Exception: CSS components can be replaced.
● The warranty is void if the server is damaged during installation or
replacement of system expansions.
● Only set screen resolutions and refresh rates that are specified in the
operating manual for the monitor. Otherwise, you may damage your monitor.
If you are in any doubt, contact your sales outlet or customer service center.
● Before installing/removing internal options to/from the server, turn off the
server, all peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug
all power cords from the outlet. Failure to do so can cause electric shock.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 47

Important information

● Do not damage or modify internal cables or devices. Doing so may cause a

device failure, fire, or electric shock and will void the warranty and exempt
the manufacturer from all liability.
● Devices inside the server remain hot after shutdown. Wait for a while after
shutdown before installing or removing internal options.
● The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and
can be damaged by static electricity. To ensure reliable protection, if you are
wearing an earthing band on your wrist when working with this type of
module, connect it to an unpainted, conducting metal part of the system.
● Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic
areas or the edges of the circuit boards.
● Install the screw removed during installation/detaching internal options in
former device/position. To use a screw of the different kind can cause a
breakdown of equipment.
● The installation indicated on this document is sometimes changed to the
kind of possible options without notice.

Batteries
● Incorrect replacement of batteries may lead to a risk of explosion. The
batteries may only be replaced with identical batteries or with a type
recommended by the manufacturer.
● Do not throw batteries into the trash can.
● Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations
concerning special waste.
● Make sure that you insert the battery the right way round.
● The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard
if mistreated. Do not disassemble, heat about 100 °C (212F), or incinerate
the battery.
● All batteries containing pollutants are marked with a symbol (a crossed-out
garbage can). In addition, the marking is provided with the chemical symbol
of the heavy metal decisive for the classification as a pollutant:
Cd Cadmium
Hg Mercury
Pb Lead

48 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Important information

Working with optical disk drives and media

When working with optical disk drives, these instructions must be followed.
V CAUTION!
● Only use CDs/DVDs/BDs that are in perfect condition, in order to
prevent data loss, equipment damage and injury.
● Check each CD/DVD/BD for damage, cracks, breakages etc. before
inserting it in the drive.
Note that any additional labels applied may change the mechanical
properties of a CD/DVD/BD and cause imbalance and vibrations.
Damaged and imbalanced CDs/DVDs/BDs can break at high drive
speeds (data loss).
Under certain circumstances, sharp CD/DVD/BD fragments can
pierce the cover of the optical disk drive (equipment damage) and can
fly out of the device (danger of injury, particularly to uncovered body
parts such as the face or neck).
● High humidity and airborne dust levels are to be avoided. Electric
shocks and/or server failures may be caused by liquids such as
water, or metallic items, such as paper clips, entering a drive.
● Shocks and vibrations are also to be avoided.
● Do not insert any objects other than the specified CDs/DVDs/BDs.
● Do not pull on, press hard, or otherwise handle the CD/DVD/BD tray
roughly.
● Do not disassemble the optical disk drive.
● Before use, clean the optical disk tray using a soft, dry cloth.
● As a precaution, remove disks from the optical disk drive when the
drive is not to be used for a long time. Keep the optical disk tray
closed to prevent foreign matter, such as dust, from entering the
optical disk drive.
● Hold CDs/DVDs/BDs by their edges to avoid contact with the disk
surface.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 49

Important information

● Do not contaminate the CD/DVD/BD surface with fingerprints, oil,

dust, etc. If dirty, clean with a soft, dry cloth, wiping from the center to
the edge. Do not use benzene, thinners, water, record sprays,
antistatic agents, or silicone-impregnated cloth.
● Be careful not to damage the CD/DVD/BD surface.
● Keep the CDs/DVDs/BDs away from heat sources.
● Do not bend or place heavy objects on CDs/DVDs/BDs.
● Do not write with ballpoint pen or pencil on the label (printed) side.
● When a CD/DVD/BD is moved from a cold place to a warm place,
moisture condensation on the CD/DVD/BD surface can cause data
read errors. In this case, wipe the CD/DVD/BD with a soft, dry cloth
then let it air dry. Do not dry the CD/DVD/BD using devices such as a
hair dryer.
● To avoid dust, damage, and deformation, keep the CD/DVD/BD in its
case whenever it is not in use.
● Do not store CDs/DVDs/BDs at high temperatures. Areas exposed to
prolonged direct sunlight or near heating appliances are to be
avoided.
I You can prevent damage from the optical disk drive and the
CDs/DVDs/BDs, as well as premature wear of the disks, by observing
the following suggestions:
– Only insert disks in the drive when needed and remove them after
use.
– Store the disks in suitable sleeves.
– Protect the disks from exposure to heat and direct sunlight.
Laser information
The optical disk drive complies with IEC 60825-1 laser class 1.
V CAUTION!
The optical disk drive contains a light-emitting diode (LED), which under
certain circumstances produces a laser beam stronger than laser
class 1. Looking directly at this beam is dangerous.
Never remove parts of the optical disk drive casing!

50 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Important information

Modules with Electrostatic-Sensitive Devices

Modules with electrostatic-sensitive devices are identified by the following
sticker:

Figure 1: ESD label

When you handle components fitted with ESDs, you must always observe the
following points:
● Switch off the system and remove the power plugs from the power outlets
before installing or removing components with ESDs.
● The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and
can be damaged by static electricity. To ensure reliable protection, you must
wear an earthing band on your wrist when working with this type of module
and connect it to an unpainted, conducting metal part of the system.
● Any devices or tools that are used must be free of electrostatic charge.
● Wear a suitable grounding cable that connects you to the external chassis
of the system unit.
● Always hold components with ESDs at the edges or at the points marked
green (touch points).
● Do not touch any connectors or conduction paths on an ESD.
● Place all the components on a pad which is free of electrostatic charge.
I For a detailed description of how to handle ESD components, see the
relevant European or international standards (EN 61340-5-1,
ANSI/ESD S20.20).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 51

Important information

Transporting the server

● Only transport the server in its original packaging or in packaging that
protects it from impacts and jolts.
For the Japanese market, transporting the device in its original packaging
does not apply.
● Do not unpack the server until it is at its installation location.
● If you need to lift or transport the server, ask other people to help you.
Because the PRIMERGY RX2540 M1 is large and heavy, at least two
people are needed.
● Never lift or carry the device by the handles on the front panel.

Notes on installing the server in the rack

● For safety reasons, at least two people are required to install the server
in the rack because of its weight and size.
(For the Japanese market, please refer to " 安全上のご注意 ".)
● Never lift the server into the rack using the handles on the front panel.
● When connecting and disconnecting cables, observe the relevant
instructions in the "Important Information" chapter of the technical manual
for the corresponding rack. The technical manual is supplied with the
corresponding rack.
● When installing the rack, make sure that the anti-tilt protection is correctly
fitted.
● For safety reasons, no more than one unit may be removed from the rack at
any one time during installation and maintenance work.
● If several units are simultaneously removed from the rack, there is a risk that
the rack could tip over.
● The rack must be connected to the power supply by an authorized specialist
(electrician).
● If the server is integrated into an installation that draws power from an
industrial power supply network with an IEC309 type connector, the power
supply's fuse protection must comply with the requirements for non-
industrial power supply networks for the type A connector.

52 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Important information

3.2 ENERGY STAR

Products that have been certified compliant with ENERGY STAR

and identified as such are in full compliance with the specification
at shipping. Note that energy consumption can be affected by
software that is installed or any changes that are made to the
hardware configuration or BIOS or energy options subsequently.
In such cases, the properties guaranteed by ENERGY STAR can
no longer be assured.
The "ServerView Operations Manager" user guide contains
instructions for reading out measurement values, including those
relating to current energy consumption and air temperatures.
Either the Performance Monitor or the Task Manager can be
used to read out CPU utilization levels.

3.3 CE conformity

The system complies with the requirements of the EC directives

2004/108/EC regarding "Electromagnetic Compatibility" and
2006/95/EC "Low Voltage Directive" and the directive of the
European Parliament and Council 2011/65/EU. This is indicated
by the CE marking (CE = Communauté Européenne).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 53

Important information

3.4 FCC Class A Compliance Statement

If there is an FCC statement on the device, it applies to the products covered in
this manual, unless otherwise specified herein. The statement for other
products will appear in the accompanying documentation.

NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
"Class A" digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules and meets all
requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003 for digital apparatus. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in strict accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no warranty that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
● Increase the separation between equipment and the receiver.
● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Fujitsu is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by
unauthorized modifications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment
of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by Fujitsu. The
correction of interferences caused by such unauthorized modification,
substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user.
The use of shielded I/O cables is required when connecting this equipment to
any and all optional peripheral or host devices. Failure to do so may violate FCC
and ICES rules.

WARNING:
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

54 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Important information

3.5 Environmental protection

Environmentally-friendly product design and development
This product has been designed in accordance with the Fujitsu standard for
"environmentally friendly product design and development". This means that
key factors such as durability, selection and labeling of materials, emissions,
packaging, ease of dismantling and recycling have been taken into account.
This saves resources and thus reduces the harm done to the environment.
Further information can be found at:
– http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/index.html (for the global market)
– http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/concept/ (for the Japanese
market)

Energy-saving information
Devices that do not need to be constantly switched on should be switched off
until they are needed as well as during long breaks and after completion of work.

Packaging information
This packaging information doesn’t apply to the Japanese market.
Do not throw away the packaging. You may need it later for transporting the
system. If possible, the equipment should only be transported in its original
packaging.

Information on handling consumables

Please dispose of printer consumables and batteries in accordance with the
applicable national regulations.
In accordance with EU directives, batteries must not be disposed of with
unsorted domestic waste. They can be returned free of charge to the
manufacturer, dealer or an authorized agent for recycling or disposal.
All batteries containing pollutants are marked with a symbol (a crossed-out
garbage can). They are also marked with the chemical symbol for the heavy
metal that causes them to be categorized as containing pollutants:
Cd Cadmium
Hg Mercury
Pb Lead

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 55

Important information

Labels on plastic casing parts

Please avoid sticking your own labels on plastic parts wherever possible, since
this makes it difficult to recycle them.

Returns, recycling and disposal

Please handle returns, recycling and disposal in accordance with local
regulations.

The device must not be disposed of with domestic waste. This

device is labeled in compliance with European directive
2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE).
This directive sets the framework for returning and recycling used
equipment and is valid across the EU. When returning your used
device, please use the return and collection systems available to
you. Further information can be found at
http://ts.fujitsu.com/recycling.
Details regarding the return and recycling of devices and consumables within
Europe can also be found in the "Returning used devices" manual, via your local
Fujitsu branch or from our recycling center in Paderborn:
Fujitsu Technology Solutions
Recycling Center
D-33106 Paderborn
Tel. +49 5251 525 1410
Fax +49 5251 525 32 1410

56 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

4 Basic hardware procedures

4.1 Using diagnostics information

Use the Fujitsu ServerView Suite management software to plan the upgrade or
replacement of hardware components. Please refer to the following ServerView
Suite topics:
– Operation
– Maintenance
It is recommended to prepare local maintenance tasks using remote diagnostics
procedures, as described in the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept
(LSC)" manual.
Please contact your local Fujitsu customer service partner for details on the
service concept and on how to order expansion kits or spare parts. Use the
Fujitsu Illustrated Spares Catalog to identify the required spare part and obtain
technical data and order information. Illustrated Spares catalogs are available
online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com/illustrated_spares (EMEA market only).
Perform the following diagnostics procedures to identify defective servers and
components.

4.1.1 Locating the defective server

When working in a datacenter environment, switch on the ID indicator on the

front and rear connector panels of the server for easy identification.
Ê Press the ID button on the front panel, use the iRMC web frontend or use
the ServerView Operations Manager user interface to switch on the system
identification LEDs.
I For further information, refer to the "ServerView Suite Local Service
Concept (LSC)" manual l and "Integrated Remote Management
Controller" user guide.
Ê When using ServerView Operations Manager to toggle the ID indicator,
choose Single System View and press the Locate button.
Ê Remember to switch off the ID indicator after the maintenance task has been
concluded successfully.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 57

Basic hardware procedures

4.1.2 Determining the error class

The Local Service Concept (LSC) allows you to identify defective server
components. Failure events are assigned to one of two error classes:
– Global Error events that need to be resolved by maintenance personnel
– Customer Self Service (CSS) error events that may be resolved by
operating personnel
Global Error and CSS LEDs indicate, if the defective component is a customer
replaceable unit or if maintenance personnel needs to be dispatched to replace
the part.
I The indicators also light up in standby mode and after a server restart
due to a power failure.

4.1.2.1 Global Error indicator

Ê Check the Global Error indicator on the front or connector panel of the
server:
Ê For further diagnostics, proceed as follows:
– Hardware errors:
Check the System Event Log (SEL) as described in section "Viewing the
SEL" on page 96.
– Software / agent related errors:
Check the ServerView System Monitor, available on Windows or Linux
based servers with ServerView agents installed.
I For further information, please refer to the "ServerView System
Monitor" user guide.

4.1.2.2 Customer Self Service (CSS) indicator

Ê Check the CSS indicator on the front panel or connector panel of the server:

58 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic hardware procedures

4.1.3 Locating the defective component

After determining the error class by the CSS or Global Error indicators (see
section "Determining the error class" on page 58) local diagnostic indicators on
the front panel and system board allow you to identify the defective component.
I For further information, refer to the "ServerView Suite Local Service
Concept (LSC)" manual.

4.1.3.1 Local diagnostic indicators on the front

Ê Check the CSS indicator on the front and connector panels of the server:
I In addition to local diagnostic indicators, CSS or Global Error LEDs
indicate, if the defective component is a customer or field replaceable
unit (see section "Determining the error class" on page 58).

4.2 Shutting down the server

V CAUTION!
For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important
information" on page 45.
I This step is only required when upgrading or replacing non-hot plug
components.
Ê Inform the system administrator that the server will be shut down and put
offline.
Ê Terminate all applications.
Ê Perform the required procedures described in the preliminary steps of each
upgrade or maintenance task.
Ê "Verifying and configuring the backup software solution" on page 79.
Ê In case of Multipath I/O environments, please refer to section "Note on
server maintenance in a Multipath I/O environment" on page 80.
Ê "Removing backup and optical disk media" on page 79.
Ê Shut down the server.
I If the system is running an ACPI-compliant operating system,
pressing the On / Off button will perform a graceful shutdown.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 59

Basic hardware procedures

Ê Switch on the ID indicator on the front and rear connector panels of the
server as described in section "Locating the defective server" on page 57.

4.3 Disconnecting power cords

Removing the server from the mains
I If there are installed two power supplies remove both power cords.

Figure 2: Removing the power cord from the PSU cable clamp

Ê Open on the locking lever on the PSU cable clamp (1).

Ê Disconnect the power cord from the PSU and remove it from the cable tie
(2).

60 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic hardware procedures

4.4 Getting access to the component

V CAUTION!
● Before removing or installing covers, turn off the server and all
peripheral devices. Also unplug all power cables from the outlet.
Failure to do so can cause electric shock.
● In order to comply with applicable EMC regulations (regulations on
electromagnetic compatibility) and satisfy cooling requirements, the
server must not run while the top / side cover is removed.
● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important
information" on page 45.

4.4.1 Extending the server out of the rack

V CAUTION!
● Use the anti-tilt plate to prevent the rack from tipping when installing
the rack. Pulling the server out of the rack without having installed the
anti-tilt plate may cause the rack to tip over.
● Be careful not to pinch fingers or clothes when sliding out the server
or pushing it back. Failure to do so may cause injury.
● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important
information" on page 45.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 61

Basic hardware procedures

Figure 3: Extending the server out of the rack

Ê Remove all remaining external cables from the rear connector panel and
expansion cards (see section "Connectors and indicators" on page 570).
I Note for installations with expansion cards in slot 5 and slot 11!
If there is a cable installed to an expansion card in the upper slot, see
section "Basic information" on page 243.
Ê If you are not using a cable mounting arm (CMA kit), ensure that the rear
cables are long enough not to be strained or damaged when extending the
server out of the rack.
Ê Fold down the two quick release levers on the rack mounting frame (1) and
pull the server out of the rack until it locks in place (2).
V CAUTION!
Do not use the extended server as a surface on which to put things or as
a work surface, and strictly avoid leaning on or against it.

62 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic hardware procedures

4.4.2 Removing the server from the rack

I In most cases maintenance tasks can be performed while the server is

extended from the rack. However, depending on accessibility or security
guidelines, it may make sense to completely remove the server from the
rack cabinet for maintenance purposes.
V CAUTION!
At least two people are needed to lift the server out of the rack cabinet.
(For the Japanese market, please refer to " 安全上のご注意 ".)

For configurations below 32 kg:

At least two people are needed to lift the server
out of the rack cabinet.

For configurations below 55 kg:

At least three people are needed to lift the server
out of the rack cabinet.

For configurations above 55 kg:

At least four people are needed to lift the server
out of the rack cabinet.

Additionally, a lifter is required in the following cases:

– The server weighs more than 50 kg.
– The server weighs more than 21 kg and is installed above the height
of 25 U.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 63

Basic hardware procedures

When using a lifter, this removal procedure needs to be carried out by

maintenance personnel.

Figure 4: Removing the server from the rack

Ê Release the locking bars on both telescopic rails (1).

Ê Lift up the front of the server as shown so that the front and middle rack
mounting bolts are disengaged from the mounting points on the telescopic
rails (2).
Ê Lift the server out of the rear mounting points (3) and place it on an even
surface.

4.4.3 Opening the server

V CAUTION!
● Before removing or installing covers, turn off the server and all
peripheral devices. Also unplug all power cables from the outlet.
Failure to do so can cause electric shock.

64 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic hardware procedures

● In order to comply with applicable EMC regulations (regulations on

electromagnetic compatibility) and satisfy cooling requirements, the
PRIMERGY RX2540 M1 server must not run while the housing cover
is removed.
● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important
information" on page 45.

4.4.3.1 Removing the housing cover

Figure 5: Removing the housing cover

Ê Open the locking lever (1). This will slide the top cover back disengaging the
locking mechanism (2).
Ê Remove the top cover (3).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 65

Basic hardware procedures

4.4.3.2 Removing the air duct

Figure 6: Removing the air duct

V CAUTION!
Be careful with the FBU cable.
If there is a FBU installed, follow the procedure that is described in
section "Removing the FBU holder from the air duct" on page 306 first.
Ê Remove the air duct.

66 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic hardware procedures

4.5 Reassembling

4.5.1 Installing the air duct

Figure 7: Installing the air duct

Ê Insert the air duct.

I Regard that the air duct engages in the guiding points.
I If there is a FBU installed, follow the procedure that is described in
section "Installing the FBU holder onto the air duct" on page 303.

4.5.2 Closing the server

V CAUTION!
● Before attaching the covers, make sure no unnecessary parts or tools
are left inside the server.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 67

Basic hardware procedures

● In order to comply with applicable EMC regulations (regulations on

electromagnetic compatibility) and satisfy cooling requirements, the
PRIMERGY RX2540 M1 server must not run while the housing cover
is removed.
● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important
information" on page 45.

4.5.2.1 Mounting the housing cover

Figure 8: Mounting the housing cover

Ê Open the locking lever on the top cover.

Ê Fit the housing cover on the chassis, aligning it according to the edge guide
marking on the upper server surface.
Ê Lower the housing cover onto the chassis (1).
Ê Close the locking lever on the housing cover. This will slide the housing
cover shut engaging the locking mechanism (2).

68 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic hardware procedures

4.5.3 Mounting the server in the rack

4.5.3.1 Seating the server on the rack rails

V CAUTION!
At least two people are needed to position the server on the rack rails.
(For the Japanese market, please refer to " 安全上のご注意 ".)

For configurations below 32 kg:

At least two people are needed to lift the server
into the rack cabinet.

For configurations below 55 kg:

At least three people are needed to lift the server
into the rack cabinet.

For configurations above 55 kg:

At least four people are needed to lift the server
into the rack cabinet.

Additionally, a lifter is required in the following cases:

– The server weighs more than 50 kg.
– The server weighs more than 21 kg and is to be installed above the
height of 25 U.
When using a lifter, this installation procedure needs to be carried out by
maintenance personnel.
I Refer to the rack cabinet manuals for more detailed information on other
support systems.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 69

Basic hardware procedures

Ê If required, install the rack mounting bracket and rack system into the rack
as described in the Rack Mounting Kit - RMK-F1/F2 DROP-IN Quick
Release Lever (QRL)" Mounting Instructions.
I The printed poster is contained in the rack mounting kit.

Figure 9: Mounting the server onto the rack rails

Ê Fully extend the telescopic rails until they lock in place (1).
Ê At a slight angle, lower the server onto the rear mounting point on the
telescopic rails (2).
Ê Fold down the server (3). Ensure that all six rack mounting bolts are properly
seated in the mounting points on the telescopic rails (4) and that the locking
bars engage (5).

70 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic hardware procedures

4.5.3.2 Sliding the server into the rack

Figure 10: Sliding the server into the rack

Ê Pull up on the locking latch on both telescopic rails (1).

Ê Slide the server inside the rack as far as it will go (2) until the quick release
levers on the rack mounting frame lock into place.
Ê Reconnect all cables except the power cord to the server rear.
I If you are not using a cable mounting arm (CMA kit), ensure that the
rear cables are long enough not to be strained or damaged when
extending the server out of the rack.
Use cable ties to prevent loose cables from blocking the air flow.
For information on connecting and securing the power cord, refer to section
"Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 71

Basic hardware procedures

4.6 Connecting the server to the power source

The PRIMERGY RX2540 M1 server is equipped with up to two standard power
supplies unit that automatically adjusts to any mains voltage in the range of
100 VAC - 240 VAC or up to two DC hot-plug power supply unit that adjusts
automatically to any power voltage in the range from -40.5 V to -57 V.

Connecting power cords to the mains

V CAUTION!
The power supply automatically adjusts to any mains voltage in the
range of 100 VAC - 240 VAC. You may only operate the server if its rated
voltage range corresponds to the local mains voltage.

Figure 11: Securing power cord

Ê Pull the cable clamp up (1).

Ê Thread the power cord through the cable clamp (2).
Ê Press the cable clamp down until it engages to secure the cable (3).
Ê Connect the mains plug to a grounded mains outlet in the in-house power
supply network or a power outlet of the rack socket strip (see also
"PRIMECENTER Rack System" assembly guide).

72 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic hardware procedures

I To provide true phase redundancy, the second power supply should

be connected to a different AC power source from the other supply. If
one AC power source should fail, the server will still continue to run.
I It takes about 60 seconds until power-on becomes possible.
4.7 Switching on the server
V CAUTION!
● Before switching on the server, make sure the housing cover is
closed. In order to comply with applicable EMC regulations
(regulations on electromagnetic compatibility) and satisfy cooling
requirements, the PRIMERGY RX2540 M1 server must not run while
the housing cover is removed.
● After connecting all power cords, wait at least 60 seconds before
pressing the On / Off button.
● Follow the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on
page 45.
Ê Press the On / Off button to start up the server.
Ê Perform the required procedures described in the concluding steps of each
upgrade or maintenance task.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 73

Basic hardware procedures

74 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

5 Basic software procedures

5.1 Starting the maintenance task

5.1.1 Suspending BitLocker functionality

BitLocker Drive Encryption provides protection for operating system and data
drives by encrypting the contents and requiring users to authenticate their
credentials to access the information. In the scenario described here, BitLocker
uses the compatible Trusted Platform Module (TPM) to detect if the computer's
startup process has been modified from its original state.
I For additional information on how to use BitLocker on a computer without
a compatible TPM, please refer to the "BitLocker Drive Encryption"
documentation page at http://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc731549.aspx.
Suspending BitLocker Drive Encryption is a temporary method for removing
BitLocker protection without decrypting the drive Windows is installed on.
Suspend BitLocker before modifying the server’s hardware configuration or
startup files. Resume BitLocker again after the maintenance procedure is
complete.
V CAUTION!
– With BitLocker features enabled, modifying the system configuration
(hardware or firmware settings) may render the system inaccessible.
The system may enter Recovery Mode and require a 48-digits
recovery password to return to normal operation.
Ensure to suspend BitLocker drive encryption before maintaining the
server.
– When suspended, BitLocker uses a plain text key instead of the
Trusted Platform Module (TPM) to read encrypted files. Keep in mind
that information on this drive is not secure until BitLocker has been
re-enabled.
Ê Ask the system administrator to suspend BitLocker-protection on the system
volume, using the BitLocker Drive Encryption control panel item.
I This will temporarily disable BitLocker for maintenance purposes.
The volume will not be decrypted and no keys will be discarded.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 75

Basic software procedures

For Windows Server 2008:

Ê Open BitLocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking
Control Panel, clicking Security, and then clicking BitLocker Drive
Encryption.
Ê Select the system volume, and click Turn Off BitLocker.
Ê From the Turn Off BitLocker dialog box, click Disable BitLocker.

For Windows Server 2008 R2 and above:

Ê Open BitLocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking
Control Panel, clicking System and Security, and then clicking BitLocker
Drive Encryption.
Ê Select the system volume, and click Suspend Protection.
Ê Click Yes to confirm that your data will not be protected while BitLocker is
suspended.
I In order to determine which features are accessible through the
BitLocker setup wizard, it may be necessary to modify the BitLocker
Group Policy settings.
For further information on how to suspend BitLocker drive
encryption, please refer to the Microsoft TechNet library at
http://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc731549.aspx.
Fujitsu service partners will find additional information (also available
in Japanese) on the Fujitsu Extranet web pages.

5.1.2 Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality

The ServerView Operations Manager boot watchdog determines whether the

server boots within a preset time frame. If the watchdog timer expires, the
system will automatically reboot.

5.1.2.1 Viewing boot watchdog settings

Viewing boot watchdog settings in the BIOS

Ê Enter the BIOS.
Ê Select the Server Mgmt menu.

76 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic software procedures

Ê Under Boot Watchdog, you can obtain detailed information about the current
watchdog status, time out intervals and actions that are triggered if
watchdog time outs are exceeded.
I For detailed information on BIOS settings, refer to the corresponding
BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

Viewing boot watchdog settings in the iRMC web frontend

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.
Ê Select the Server Management menu.
Ê Under Watchdog Settings, you can obtain detailed information about the
current watchdog status, time out intervals and actions that are triggered if
watchdog time outs are exceeded.
I For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated
Remote Management Controller" user guide.

Viewing boot watchdog settings in ServerView Operations Manager

Ê In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View select Maintenance
from the Information / Operation menu.
Ê Under ASR&R select the Watchdog tab to obtain detailed information about
the current watchdog status, time out intervals and actions that are triggered
if watchdog time outs are exceeded.
I For more detailed information, refer to the "ServerView Operations
Manager - Server Management" user guide.

5.1.2.2 Configuring boot watchdog settings

If the system is to be started from removable boot media for firmware upgrade
purposes, the Boot watchdog needs to be disabled before starting maintenance
task. Otherwise, the Boot watchdog might initiate a system reboot before the
flash process is complete.
V CAUTION!
An incomplete firmware upgrade process may render the server
inaccessible or result in damaged / destroyed hardware.
Timer settings can be configured in the BIOS or using the ServerView iRMC
web frontend:

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 77

Basic software procedures

Configuring boot watchdog settings in the BIOS

Ê Enter the BIOS.
Ê Select the Server Mgmt menu.
Ê Under Boot Watchdog set the Action setting to Continue.
Ê Save your changes and exit the BIOS.
I For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings,
refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

Configuring boot watchdog settings using the iRMC web frontend

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.
Ê Select the Server Management menu.
Ê Under Watchdog Settings select Continue from the Boot Watchdog drop down
list.
Ê Click Apply for the changes to take effect.
I For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated
Remote Management Controller" user guide.

78 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic software procedures

5.1.3 Removing backup and optical disk media

Ê Ask the system administrator to eject all remaining backup or optical media
from the backup or optical disk drive before removing it from the server.
Ê If the backup media cannot be ejected by conventional means, and it is
mandatory that the cartridge be removed prior to returning the drive for
repair or disposing it, a manual tape extraction needs to be performed.
For further information on "forcible" tape ejection, please refer to the "Tape
Facts" guide available to Fujitsu service partners from the following https
address:
https://partners.ts.fujitsu.com/com/service/ps/Servers/PRIMERGY/Pages/
TapeFacts.aspx
For the Japanese market, please contact Fujitsu support, if "forcible" tape
ejection is necessary.
I Fujitsu does not assume responsibility for any damage to the tape
drive, the data cartridge / tape or for the loss of any data resulting
from manual tape extraction procedures.

5.1.4 Verifying and configuring the backup software

solution

I This task only applies to the Japanese market.

Depending on the backup software solution, it may be necessary to disable or
delete the backup drive from the backup software drive list before starting the
maintenance task.
This is the case for the following backup software solution:
– BackupExec
I Procedures may differ depending on the backup software. For details,
refer to the dedicated documentation provided separately.
Further information on suitable backup software solutions and related
documentation is available to Fujitsu service partners from the Fujitsu
Extranet pages.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 79

Basic software procedures

5.1.5 Note on server maintenance in a Multipath I/O

environment

When booting your server offline from the ServerView Suite DVD to perform an
offline BIOS / firmware update using the ServerView Update DVD or collect
diagnostic data using PrimeCollect in a Multipath I/O environment, there is a risk
of damaging the system configuration which may leave the system unable to
boot.
I This is a known restriction of Windows PE with Multipath drivers.
Using Update Manager Express
Ê If performing an offline BIOS / firmware update, first of all prepare the
ServerView Update DVD or USB stick:
Ê Download the latest ServerView Update DVD image from Fujitsu:
for the EMEA market
ftp://ftp.ts.fujitsu.com/images/serverview
for the Japanese market:
http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/products/note/svsdvd/dvd/
Ê Burn the image to a DVD.
Ê In order to create a bootable USB stick, please proceed as described in
the "Local System Update for PRIMERGY Servers" user guide.
Ê Before using the ServerView Update DVD or USB stick in an offline
environment, properly shut down the server and disconnect all external I/O
connections (like LAN, FC or SAS cables) from the system. Only keep
mouse, keyboard, video cable and AC power cord connected.
I Ensure that all external I/O connections are uniquely identified so that
you can reconnect them into their original locations after concluding
the task.
To start Update Manager Express from the (physical) Update DVD or from a
USB stick, proceed as follows:
Ê Prepare your Update DVD or USB stick as described in the "Local System
Update for PRIMERGY Servers" user guide.
Ê Boot the server from the prepared Update DVD or USB stick:

80 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic software procedures

DVD: Ê Switch on the server.

Ê Right after switching on the server, insert the Update DVD into the
DVD drive and close the tray.
USB: Ê Connect the USB stick to the server.
Ê Switch on the server.
If the server does not boot from DVD or USB stick, proceed as follows:
Ê Reboot the server, e.g. by pressing the reset button on the front or
switching the server off and then on again after a few seconds.
Ê Once the server has been started, press [F12] to enter the boot menu.
Ê Use the Ê and Ë cursor keys to select your DVD drive or USB stick as
boot device and press [ENTER].
The server will now boot from the Update DVD or USB stick.
Ê After the boot process is complete, select your preferred GUI language.
The Update Manager Express main window will be displayed.
Ê Finish the intended maintenance task.
I For further information, refer to the "Local System Update for
PRIMERGY Servers" user guide.

Using PrimeCollect
To start PrimeCollect, proceed as follows:
Ê Before using PrimeCollect in an offline environment, properly shut down the
server and disconnect all external I/O connections (like LAN, FC or SAS
cables) from the system. Only keep mouse, keyboard, video cable and AC
power cord connected.
I Ensure that all external I/O connections are uniquely identified so that
you can reconnect them into their original locations after concluding
the task.
Ê Switch on the server.
Ê Right after switching on the server, insert the ServerView Suite DVD into the
DVD drive and close the drive tray.
If the server does not boot from DVD, proceed as follows:

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 81

Basic software procedures

Ê Reboot the server, e.g. by pressing the reset button on the front or
switching the server off and then on again after a few seconds.
Ê Once the server has been started, press [F12] to enter the boot menu.
Ê Use the Ê and Ë cursor keys to select your DVD drive as boot device
and press [ENTER].
The server will now boot from the ServerView Suite DVD.
Ê After the boot process is complete, select your preferred GUI language.
Ê In the initial Installation Manager startup window, choose PrimeCollect from
the Installation Manager mode section.
Ê Click Continue to proceed.
Ê Finish the intended maintenance task.
I For further information, refer to the "PrimeCollect" user guide.
Concluding the procedure
Ê After the update or diagnostic procedure has been completed, shut down the
server, reconnect all external I/O connections and bring the system back to
normal operation.
Ê If necessary, perform this procedure for all remaining servers within the
Multipath environment.

5.1.6 Switching on the ID indicator

When working in a datacenter environment, switch on the ID indicator on the

front and rear connector panels of the server for easy identification.
I For further information, refer to section "Locating the defective server" on
page 57 or to the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" and
"Integrated Remote Management Controller" user guides.

Using the ID button on the front panel

Ê Press the ID button on the front panel to switch on the system identification
LEDs.
I For further information, refer to section "Front panel controls and
indicators" on page 579.

82 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic software procedures

Using the iRMC web frontend

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.
Ê Under System Overview, click Identify LED On to switch on the ID indicators.

Using ServerView Operations Manager

Ê In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View press the Locate
button in the title bar to switch on the ID indicators.

5.2 Completing the maintenance task

5.2.1 Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and

iRMC

I For the Japanese market, follow the instructions provided separately.

After replacing the system board, memory or a CPU, it is essential to upgrade
the BIOS and iRMC to the latest version. The latest BIOS and iRMC versions
are available from the Fujitsu support internet pages at:
http://ts.fujitsu.com/support/ (EMEA market)
http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/downloads/ (Japanese market)
I Fujitsu does not assume responsibility for any damage done to the
server or for the loss of any data resulting from BIOS updates.

5.2.1.1 Updating or recovering the system board BIOS

BIOS flash procedure

Ê Perform the BIOS flash procedure as described in your server’s "BIOS
Setup Utility" reference manual.

BIOS recovery procedure

Ê Perform the BIOS recovery procedure as described in your server’s "BIOS
Setup Utility" reference manual.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 83

Basic software procedures

5.2.1.2 Updating or recovering the iRMC

iRMC flash procedure

Ê Prepare a USB stick including the bootable iRMC firmware update image.
Ê Connect the USB stick to the USB port.
I Ensure that only the USB device with the iRMC firmware is connected
to the USB port. Remove all other USB devices temporarily.
Ê Restart the server.
Ê The system will detect the USB stick.
I If the BIOS cannot identify the USB stick, the pop-up message
Failed to boot for Emergency flash. Please Reset now.
will show up in the center of the screen.
Ê Choose one of the following options from the update tool menu to start the
iRMC update process:
Normal
Choose this option to update an existing system board.
Initial Choose this option if the system board has been replaced prior to the
iRMC update procedure. This option will perform all relevant flash
procedures in a row, including the iRMC firmware and bootloader.
V CAUTION!
Do not interrupt the iRMC upgrade process after it has started. If the
process is interrupted, the iRMC BIOS may be permanently
corrupted.
I If the iRMC does not work after flashing, disconnect the system from
the mains and reconnect it again.
Ê After completion of the flash process, remove the USB stick and restart the
server.

iRMC recovery procedure

Ê Prepare a USB stick including the bootable iRMC firmware update image.
Ê Ensure that the server has been shut down and disconnected from the
mains as described in section "Shutting down the server" on page 59.
Ê Connect the USB stick to the USB port.

84 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic software procedures

I Ensure that only the USB device with the iRMC firmware is connected
to the USB port. Remove all other USB devices temporarily.
Ê Connect the server to the mains while pushing the ID button on the front
panel. Ask a second person to help you if necessary.
Ê Ensure that the Global Error indicator and the ID indicator are flashing to
indicate that the server is entering the iRMC recovery state.
Ê Press the Power On / Off button. The system starts the POST process.
I In iRMC recovery mode, the “FUJITSU” logo does not show up.
Ê The system will detect the USB stick.
I If the BIOS cannot identify the USB stick, the pop-up message
Failed to boot for Emergency flash. Please Reset now.
will show up in the center of the screen.
Ê Choose the Recovery_L option from the update tool menu to start the iRMC
update process.
V CAUTION!
Do not interrupt the iRMC upgrade process after it has started. If the
process is interrupted, the iRMC BIOS may be permanently
corrupted.
I If the iRMC does not work after flashing, disconnect the system from
the mains and reconnect it again.
Ê Shut down the server by pressing the power On / Off button.
Ê Disconnect the server from the mains to exit the iRMC recovery state.

5.2.2 Verifying system information backup / restore

To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system board, a
backup copy of important system configuration data is automatically stored from
the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID EPROM. After replacing the
system board the backup data is restored from the Chassis ID board to the new
system board.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 85

Basic software procedures

In order to verify whether the backup or restore process has been successful,
check the System Event Log (SEL) using the ServerView Operations Manager
(see also section "Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL)" on
page 96).

86 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic software procedures

After replacing the system board

Ê Check the SEL log files as described in section "Viewing and clearing the
System Event Log (SEL)" on page 96 to verify whether the backup data on
the Chassis ID EPROM has been restored to the system board:
Chassis IDPROM: Restore successful

After replacing the Chassis ID EPROM

Ê Check the SEL log files as described in section "Viewing and clearing the
System Event Log (SEL)" on page 96 to verify whether a backup copy of the
system board settings has been transferred to the Chassis ID EPROM:
Chassis IDPROM: Backup successful

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 87

Basic software procedures

5.2.3 Updating RAID controller firmware

After replacing the RAID controller, it is essential to upgrade the firmware to the
latest version. The latest RAID controller firmware version is available from the
Fujitsu support web pages at:
http://ts.fujitsu.com/support/ (EMEA market)
http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/downloads/ (Japanese market)
I Fujitsu does not assume responsibility for any damage done to the
server or for the loss of any data resulting from firmware updates.
For the Japanese market, follow the instructions provided separately.

Using the ServerView Update Manager

For a detailed description on how to update the RAID controller firmware using
the ServerView Update Manager or Update Manager Express (UME), please
refer to the following manuals:
– ServerView Update Manager:
"ServerView Update Management" user guide
– ServerView Update Manager Express:
"Local System Update for PRIMERGY Servers" user guide

Using the flash tool

The latest firmware files are available as ASPs (Autonomous Support
Packages) for Windows or as DOS tools from the Fujitsu support web pages at:
http://ts.fujitsu.com/support/ (EMEA market)
http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/downloads/ (Japanese market)
Ê Select Drivers & Downloads.
Ê From the Select Product drop down lists, choose your PRIMERGY server or
enter its serial or ident number into the search field.
Ê Select your operating system and version.
Ê Select the desired component type (e.g. SAS RAID).
Ê Select your controller from the device list to expand a compilation of
available drivers and firmware.
Ê Select the desired file and click Download for further instructions.

88 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic software procedures

5.2.4 Enabling Option ROM scan

In order to configure an expansion card that has been installed or replaced, the
card’s Option ROM has to be enabled in the system board BIOS. The card’s
firmware is called by the system BIOS upon reboot and can be entered and
configured.
Option ROM can be enabled permanently (e.g. in case of a boot controller that
may require frequent setup) or temporarily for one-time configuration. When
permanently enabling a controllers’s Option ROM, keep in mind that only two
Option ROMs can be activated in the system board BIOS at a time.
Ê Enter the BIOS.
Ê From the Advanced menu select Option ROM Configuration.
Ê Identify the desired PCI slot and set its Launch Slot # OpROM setting to
Enabled.
Ê Save your changes and exit the BIOS.
I Up to two Option ROMs can be activated in the system board BIOS
at a time.
For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify
settings, refer to corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.
When the enabled expansion card is initialized during the POST phase of the
boot sequence, a key combination is displayed temporarily to enter the
expansion card’s firmware.
Ê Press the displayed key combination.
Ê Modify the expansion card firmware options as desired.
Ê Save your changes and exit the firmware.
I The expansion card’s option ROM can now be disabled in the system
board BIOS.
Exception: If the expansion card controls a permanent boot device, the
card’s Option ROM has to remain enabled.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 89

Basic software procedures

5.2.5 Verifying and configuring the backup software

solution

I This task only applies to the Japanese market.

Disabling backup drives
Depending on the backup software solution, it may be necessary to disable or
delete the backup drive from the backup software drive list and reconfigure
backup jobs after completing the maintenance task.
This is the case for the following backup software solutions:
– Netvault for Windows
– ARCServe
– BackupExec
I Procedures may differ depending on the backup software. For details,
refer to the dedicated documentation provided separately.
Further information on suitable backup software solutions and related
documentation is available to Fujitsu service partners from the Fujitsu
Extranet pages.

Re-enabling backup drives

If a backup drive has been disabled or deleted from the backup software drive
list as described in section 5.1.4 on page 79, it has to be re-enabled to complete
the maintenance task.
Ê Re-enable backup drives and revise backup software settings and cronjobs.
I Detailed information on suitable backup software solutions and
related documentation is available to Fujitsu service partners from the
Fujitsu Extranet pages

90 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic software procedures

5.2.6 Resetting the boot retry counter

The boot retry counter is decremented from its preset value every time the
POST watchdog initiates a system reboot. When the value has reached ’0’, the
system will shut down and power off.

5.2.6.1 Viewing the boot retry counter

The current boot retry counter status is available in the BIOS:

Ê Enter the BIOS.
Ê Select the Server Mgmt menu.
Ê Under Boot Retry Counter the current number of remaining boot attempts is
displayed. The value is further decremented with every failed boot attempt
or system reboot resulting from critical system errors.
Ê Exit the BIOS.

5.2.6.2 Resetting the boot retry counter

The boot retry counter should be reset to its original value concluding every
service task.
I Please note, if the customer does not know about the original boot
retry values:
If the system boots up and no further errors occur within 6 hours after that
successful boot attempt, the boot retry counter will automatically be reset
to its default value. Please take into account, that the specified number
of boot attempts can only be determined after this period of time.
If the customer knows about the original boot retry values, proceed as follows
to reset or configure the boot retry counter:

Resetting the boot retry counter in the BIOS

Ê Enter the BIOS.
Ê Select the Server Mgmt menu.
Ê Under Boot Retry Counter press the [+] or [-]keys to specify the maximum
number of boot attempts (0 to 7).
Ê Exit the BIOS.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 91

Basic software procedures

Resetting the boot retry counter using the ServerView Operations

Manager
Ê In the ServerView Operations Manager Administration view, select Server
Configuration.
Ê If more than one server is managed in SVOM, select the target server and
click Next.
Ê From the Server Configuration menu pane, choose Restart Options.
Ê Under Reboot Retries, specify the maximum number of boot attempts (0 to 7)
in the Default for reboot tries field.

Resetting the boot retry counter using iRMC web frontend

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.
Ê Select the Server Management menu.
Ê The following boot retry counter settings are available under ASR&R Options:
Ê Under Retry counter max specify the maximum number of attempts to boot
the operating system (0 to 7).
Ê Under Retry counter the current number of remaining boot attempts is
displayed. Overwrite this value with the maximum number of boot
attempts specified above in order to reset the boot retry counter.
Ê Click Apply for the changes to take effect.
I For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated
Remote Management Controller" user guide.

92 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic software procedures

5.2.7 Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality

If ServerView Operations Manager boot watchdog functionality has been

disabled for firmware upgrade purposes (see section 5.1.2 on page 76), it has
to be re-enabled to complete the maintenance task.
Timer settings can be configured in the BIOS or using the ServerView iRMC
web frontend:

Configuring boot watchdog settings in the BIOS

Ê Enter the BIOS.
Ê Select the Server Mgmt menu.
Ê Under Boot Watchdog set the Action setting to Reset.
Ê Save your changes and exit the BIOS.
I For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings,
refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

Configuring boot watchdog settings using the iRMC web frontend

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.
Ê Select the Server Management menu.
Ê Under Watchdog Settings ensure that the check box next to Boot Watchdog is
selected. From the drop down list choose Reset and specify the desired
timeout delay.
Ê Click Apply for the changes to take effect.
I For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated
Remote Management Controller" user guide.

5.2.8 Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS

When a processor, an expansion card, or a memory module fails, the defective

component will be set to Disabled or Failed in the system BIOS. The server will
then reboot with only the intact hardware components remaining in the system
configuration. After replacing the defective component, it needs to be re-
enabled in the system board BIOS.
Ê Enter the BIOS.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 93

Basic software procedures

Ê Select the Advanced menu.

Ê Select the status menu of the desired component:
– Processors: CPU Status
I This option is only available for multi-processor systems.
– Memory: Memory Status
– Expansion cards: PCI Status
Ê Reset replaced components to Enable.
Ê Save your changes and exit the BIOS.
I For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings,
refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

5.2.9 Verifying the memory mode

If a memory module fails, the server will reboot and the defective module will be
disabled. As a result, the current operation mode (e.g. Mirrored Channel mode)
may no longer be available due to a lack of identical memory module pairs. In
this case, the operation mode will automatically revert to Independent Channel
Mode.
I For detailed information on memory operation modes available for your
server, refer to section "Memory sequence" on page 335.
After replacing the defective module(s) the memory operation mode is
automatically reset to its original state. It is recommended to verify that the
operation mode has been correctly.
Ê Enter the BIOS.
Ê Select the Advanced menu.
Ê Under Memory Status verify that none of the memory modules are marked as
Failed.
Ê Save your changes (if applicable) and exit the BIOS.
I For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings,
refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

94 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic software procedures

5.2.10 Verifying the system time settings

I This task only applies to Linux environments.

After the system board has been replaced, the system time is set automatically.
By default, the RTC (Real Time Clock) time standard is set as the local time.
If a Linux OS is used and the hardware clock has been configured as UTC
(Universal Time, Coordinated) in the operating system, the BMC local time may
not be mapped correctly.
Ê After replacing the system board, ask the system administrator whether the
RTC or UTC time standard is to be used as system time.
I If the system time (RTC) is set to UTC, the SEL (System Event Log)
time stamps may differ from the local time.
Ê Enter the BIOS.
Ê Select the Main menu.
Ê Under System Time and System Date specify the correct time and date.
I By default, the system time set in the BIOS is RTC (Real Time Clock)
local time. If your IT infrastructure relies on universally accepted time
standards, set the System Time to UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated)
instead. Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) can be considered equivalent
to UTC.
Ê Save your changes and exit the BIOS.
I For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings,
refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 95

Basic software procedures

5.2.11 Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL)

5.2.11.1 Viewing the SEL

You can view the System Event Log (SEL) using the ServerView Operations
Manager or the ServerView iRMC web frontend:

Viewing the SEL in ServerView Operations Manager

Ê In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View select Maintenance
from the Information / Operation menu.
Ê Under Maintenance select System Event Log.
Ê Select the message type(s) you want to display:
– Critical events
– Major events
– Minor events
– Informational events
I Note on the SVOM Driver Monitor
The Driver Monitor view gives you an overview of the monitored
components as well as the associated events contained in the system
event log on the managed server.
Under Monitored Components the monitored components are listed. If a
component has the status Warning or Error, you can select it in the list
and click Acknowledge. This confirms the event on the server side. You
may have to log on to the server beforehand. The status of the
component will then be reset to ok. To see the new status you must
refresh the Driver Monitor view with Refresh.
I For detailed information on how to view and sort the SEL using
ServerView Operations Manager, refer to the "ServerView Operations
Manager - Server Management" user guide.

96 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic software procedures

Viewing the SEL using the iRMC web frontend

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.
Ê Select the Event Log and choose the Internal Event Log submenu.
Ê Under Internal Event Log Content the SEL is being displayed. In order to filter
the list, select the check boxes next to the desired event types and press
Apply for the changes to take effect.
I For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated
Remote Management Controller" user guide.

5.2.11.2 Clearing the SEL

You can clear the System Event Log (SEL) using the ServerView iRMC web
frontend:
Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.
Ê Select the Event Log and choose the Internal Event Log submenu.
Ê Under Internal Event Log Information click Clear Internal Event Log to clear the
SEL.
I For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated
Remote Management Controller" user guide.

5.2.12 Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux

environment

In order to prevent errors caused by changing network device names (eth<x>),

it is recommended to store the MAC address (hardware address) of a network
interface card in the related NIC configuration file of the Linux OS.
When replacing a network controller or the system board with onboard LAN
controllers in a server running Linux OS, the MAC address will change but not
automatically be updated in the definition file.
In order to prevent communication problems, it is necessary to update the
changed MAC address stored in the related ifcfg-eth<x> definition file.
To update the MAC address, proceed as follows:

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 97

Basic software procedures

I Procedures may differ depending on your Linux OS or the definition file

on the client system. Use the following information as reference. Ask the
system administrator to change the definition file.
Ê After replacing a network controller or the system board, switch on and boot
the server as described in section "Switching on the server" on page 73.
kudzu, the hardware configuration tool for Red Hat Linux, will launch at boot
and detect the new and / or changed hardware on your system.
I kudzu may not launch at boot depending on the client’s environment.
Ê Select Keep Configuration and Ignore to complete the boot process.
Ê Use the vi text editor to specify the MAC address in the HWADDR section of
the ifcfg-eth<x> file:
I The MAC address can be found on the type label attached to the
system board or network controller.

Example:
In order to modify the definition file for network controller 1, enter the
following command:
# vi /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth1
In vi, specify the new MAC address as follows:
HWADDR=xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
Ê Save and close the definition file.
Ê For the changes to take effect, you need to reboot the network by entering
the following command:
# service network restart
I If the system board or network controller offers multiple LAN ports, it is
necessary to update the remaining ifcfg-eth<x> definition files
accordingly.
Ê Update the NIC configuration file to reflect the new card sequence and MAC
address.

98 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic software procedures

5.2.13 Resuming BitLocker functionality

If BitLocker Drive Encryption has been suspended for maintenance purposes

(see section "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75), it has to be re-
enabled to complete the service task.
I If BitLocker Drive Encryption has been suspended prior to replacing
components you won't be asked for a recovery key when rebooting the
server after the maintenance task. However, if BitLocker functionality has
not been suspended, Windows will enter recovery mode and ask you to
input recovery key for further booting.
Ê In this case, ask the system administrator to enter the recovery key in
order to boot the operating system.
Ê Ask the system administrator to enable the previously suspended BitLocker-
protection on the system volume, using the BitLocker Drive Encryption control
panel item:

For Windows Server 2008:

Ê Open BitLocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking
Control Panel, clicking Security, and then clicking BitLocker Drive
Encryption.
Ê Select the system volume, and click Turn On BitLocker.

For Windows Server 2008 R2 and above:

Ê Open BitLocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking
Control Panel, clicking System and Security, and then clicking BitLocker
Drive Encryption.
Ê Select the system volume, and click Resume Protection.
I For further information on how to resume BitLocker drive
encryption, please refer to the Microsoft TechNet library at
http://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc731549.aspx.
Fujitsu service partners will find additional information (also available
in Japanese) on the Fujitsu Extranet web pages.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 99

Basic software procedures

5.2.14 Performing a RAID array rebuild

After replacing a hard disk drive that has been combined into a RAID array,
RAID rebuild will be performed completely unattended as a background
process.
Ê Ensure that the RAID array rebuild has started normally. Wait until the
progress bar has reached at least one percent.
Ê Inform the customer about the remaining rebuild time, based on the
displayed duration estimate.

Figure 12: Progress bar (RAID array rebuild)

V CAUTION!
The system is now operational, however, data redundancy will not be
available until the RAID array rebuild is complete. Depending on the hard
disk drive capacity the overall process can take up to several hours, in
some cases even days.
I You may notice a slight performance impact during rebuild.

5.2.15 Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses

When replacing a network controller, the MAC (Media Access Control) and
WWN (World Wide Name) addresses will change.
I In addition to the procedures described below, MAC / WWN addresses
can also be found on the type label attached to a network controller or
system board.

5.2.15.1 Looking up MAC addresses

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.

Ê Select the System Information menu.

100 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic software procedures

Ê Under Network Inventory, you will find detailed information on each network
controller in the managed PRIMERGY server, including its MAC address.
I This information is only available with the iRMC S4 or above.
Only network controllers supporting the Command Line Protocol
(CLP) will be displayed.
Ê Inform the customer about the changed MAC address.

5.2.15.2 Looking up WWN addresses

Emulex FC / FCoE adapters

Ê Enable the network controller’s Option ROM in the system board BIOS as
described in section "Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 89.
Ê Restart the server.
Ê During boot, as soon as the Emulex BIOS utility option appears, press
[ALT]+[E] or [CTRL]+[E].
Ê Under Emulex Adapters in the System you will find all available Emulex
adapters and their WWN addresses.
Ê Note down the new 16-digit WWN address.
Ê Press [Esc] to exit the Emulex BIOS utility.
Ê Inform the customer about the changed WWN address.

QLogic FC adapters
Ê Enable the network controller’s Option ROM in the system board BIOS as
described in section "Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 89.
Ê Restart the server.
Ê During boot, as soon as the QLogic BIOS utility option appears, press
[ALT]+[Q] or [CTRL]+[Q].
Ê Under Select Host Adapter use the arrow keys æ/Ë to select the desired
FC / FCoE adapter and press [Enter].
Ê From the Fast!UTIL Options menu, select Configuration Settings, and press
[Enter].
Ê From the Configuration Settings menu, select Adapter Settings, and press
[Enter].

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 101

Basic software procedures

Ê Note down the new 16-digit WWN address found under Adapter Port Name.
Ê Press [Esc] to return to the main menu and exit the QLogic BIOS utility.
Ê Inform the customer about the changed WWN address.

102 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic software procedures

5.2.16 Using the Chassis ID Prom Tool

The Chassis ID EPROM located on a dedicated Chassis ID board or on your

server’s front panel board contains system information like server name and
model, housing type, serial number and manufacturing data.
In order to integrate your system into the ServerView management environment
and to enable server installation using the ServerView Installation Manager,
system data needs to be complete and correct.
After replacing the Chassis ID EPROM, system information has to be entered
using the Chassis ID Prom tool. The tool and further instructions are available
to maintenance personnel from the Fujitsu Technology Solutions Extranet:
https://partners.ts.fujitsu.com/com/service/ps/Servers/PRIMERGY/
Ê Select your PRIMERGY system from the main area of the page.
Ê From the categories selection, choose Software & Tools Documentation.
Ê In the Tools area click Tools: Chassis-IDProm Tool to download the file
(tool-chassis-Idprom-Tool.zip).
I For the Japanese market, follow the instructions provided separately.
Note on Cool-safe® Advanced Thermal Design (ATD)
I If the Cool-safe ®
Advanced Thermal Design (ATD) option is available
and has been enabled for your server, please set information within the
Chassis ID Prom Tool accordingly.

The ATD option can only be ordered from the manufacturer

as a factory preset. To find out if your server is ATD-
enabled, check for the ATD logo on the identification rating
plate.
For further information on Cool-safe® Advanced Thermal
Design (ATD), please refer to your server’s operating
manual.
V CAUTION!
Please note that you can only set the ATD flag. Resetting the ATD flag
using the Chassis ID Prom Tool is not possible!

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 103

Basic software procedures

5.2.17 Configuring LAN teaming

Use ServerView Operations Manager to obtain detailed information on existing

LAN teams:
Ê In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View select System Status
from the Information / Operation menu.
Ê Under Network Interfaces select LAN Teaming.
Ê The Network Interfaces (Summary) overview shows all configured LAN teams
and their components. Choose a LAN team to display further details:
– LAN Team Properties: Properties of the selected LAN team
– LAN Team Statistics: Available statistics about the selected LAN team
I For more detailed information, refer to the "ServerView Operations
Manager - Server Management" user guide.

5.2.17.1 After replacing / upgrading LAN controllers

Please note when re-using a replaced LAN controller:

Ê Confirm with the customer whether the LAN controller you have replaced
has been used as part of a LAN teaming configuration.
Ê If LAN teaming has been active, you will need to restore the configuration
using the LAN driver utility after replacing the LAN controller.
Ensure that the controllers have been assigned as primary or secondary
according to your requirements.
I For details, refer to the relevant LAN driver manual.
5.2.17.2 After replacing the system board

Ê Confirm with the customer whether the onboard LAN controller you have
replaced has been used as part of a LAN teaming configuration.
Ê If LAN teaming has been active, you will need to restore the configuration
using the LAN driver utility after replacing the system board.
I For details, refer to the relevant LAN driver manual.

104 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic software procedures

5.2.18 Switching off the ID indicator

Press the ID button on the front panel, or use the iRMC web frontend or
ServerView Operations Manager to switch off the ID indicator after the
maintenance task has been concluded successfully.
I For further information, refer to section "Locating the defective server" on
page 57 or to the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" and
"Integrated Remote Management Controller" user guides.

Using the ID button on the front panel

Ê Press the ID button on the front panel to switch off the ID indicators.

Using the iRMC web frontend

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.
Ê Under System Overview, click Identify LED Off to switch off the ID indicators.

Using ServerView Operations Manager

Ê In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View and press the Locate
button in the title bar to switch off the ID indicator.

5.2.19 Performing a fan test after replacing a defective fan

After replacing a defective system fan or power supply unit containing a

defective fan, the fan error indicators will stay lit until the next fan test. By
default, a fan test is automatically started every 24 hours. The first automatic fan
test being performed after replacing a fan will turn off the fan error indicator.
If you want to start the fan test manually, you can do so by following the
description below:

Executing the fan test via the iRMC Web interface

Ê Log into the iRMC web interface.
Ê Under Sensors select Fans.
Ê Select the replaced fan in the system fans group and click Start Fan Test.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 105

Basic software procedures

I For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated

Remote Management Controller" user guide.

Executing the fan test via ServerView Operations Manager

Ê Open the ServerView Operations Manager and log in.
Ê Under Administration select Server Configuration.
Ê In the hierarchy tree of the Server list tab, select the server to be configured.
Ê In the right-hand side of the window, specify the details on the selected
server and confirm your entries by clicking GO....
In the left-hand section of the window, the Configuration tab is being
activated.
Ê In the navigation area of the Configuration tab, select Other Settings.
Ê Under Daily Fan Test, set the daily fan test time to a few minutes from the
current time. (Ensure to note down your previous setting.)
Ê Click Save Page.
The fan test will be started at the specified time.
Ê After the fan test is complete, restore the time setting to its initial value and
click Save Page.
I For more detailed information, refer to the "ServerView Operations
Manager" user guide.

For the Japanese market: Executing the fan test via Chassis ID Prom Tool
I Please follow the instructions provided separately.

5.2.20 Upgrading or replacing the processor

In case of replacing a CPU, check the status of CPU after replacing via
ServerView.
Ê check the status of SVOM status screen "Baseboard" => "CPU".
I If the CPU is replaced after a pre-failure error occurs, you should
refresh the status as follows

106 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Basic software procedures

Windows
Ê Choose Start Menu
Ê Choose All programs - Fujitsu ServerView Agents - Fujitsu Server View -
Maintenance Tool
Ê Change the Reset Status to CPU Status.
Ê Check that the status of replaced CPU is not prefailure in in ServerView.

Linux
Ê Execute following command to refresh the status of CPU
eecdcp -c oc=0609 oi=<CPU#>
*: <CPU#> value is "0" for CPU1 and "1" for CPU2
Ê Check that the status of replaced CPU is not prefailure in ServerView.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 107

Basic software procedures

108 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

6 Power supply units
Safety notes
V CAUTION!
● Do not disassemble the power supply unit. Doing so may cause
electric shock.
● Areas around the power supply unit may remain extremely hot after
shutdown. After shutting down the server, wait for hot components to
cool down before removing the power supply unit.
● When installing a power supply unit, ensure that the connector of the
power supply unit is not damaged or bent.
● If the power supply unit is hard to remove, do not pull it out by force.
● The power supply unit is heavy, so handle it carefully. If you drop it by
mistake, injuries may result.
● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important
information" on page 45.

6.1 Basic information

The PRIMERGY RX2540 M1 server can be equipped:
– with up to two power supply units that automatically adjust to any mains
voltage in the range of 100 VAC - 240 VAC
I For 800 W (Titanium) power supply unit:
Mains input voltage range: 200 VAC – 240 VAC
I Power redundancy is possible with two power supply units. The effective
power of the power supply units may not differ.
V CAUTION!
The server supports a mains voltage in the range of 100 VAC - 240 VAC.
You may only operate the server if its rated voltage range corresponds to
the local mains voltage.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 109

Power supply units

6.1.1 Power supply unit configurations

Figure 13: Hot-plug power supply units

Power Number in Power item Part Number

class figure
1 450 W Platinum A3C40175929 /
S26113-E575-V53
1
1 450 W Platinum A3C40172099 /
S26113-E575-V70
2 800 W Platinum A3C40175928 /
S26113-E574-V53
2
3 800 W Titanium A3C40169522 /
S26113-E615-V50
3 4 1200 W Platinum A3C40170546 /
S26113-E616-V50

I All different hot-plug power supply units are to install, to remove or to

replace in the same way.

110 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Power supply units

6.1.2 Assembly rules

– Mixed assembly of hot-plug power supply units from different power

classes(e.g. class 1, class 2, or class 3) within a system is not released.
– Mixing of Platinum and Titanium PSU within same class (e.g. class 2) within
a system is not released.
– Mixing of Platinum PSUs within same class and different manufacturer (e.g.
class 1) within a system is released.
– Always install a dummy cover into an unused power supply unit bay to
comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.
– For a redundant power supply configurations you need always two hot-plug
power supply units with the same power class.
I Note for servers using CMA (Cable Management Arm)
Regarding of removing power supply units, additional tasks are needed,
due to an interference between CMA stopper and the power supply units.
Ê Unlock the CMA stopper.
Ê Remove the CMA stopper with the mounted crossbar.
Ê Support the CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA including cables
with your right hand.
Ê Remove the power supply unit and install a dummy cover into the
empty bay.
Ê Remount the complete assembly (CMA stopper, crossbar and CMA)
into the rail.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 111

Power supply units

6.1.3 Power supply unit slots

PSU 1 PSU 2

Figure 14: Power supply unit slots

6.2 Installing hot-plug power supply units

Customer Replaceable Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(CRU)

Tools: tool-less

6.2.1 Preliminary steps

No steps needed.

112 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Power supply units

6.2.2 Removing the dummy cover

Figure 15: Removing the dummy cover

Ê Press in on both release latches (1) and remove the dummy cover (2).
V CAUTION!
Keep the dummy cover for future use. If a power supply unit is
removed and not immediately replaced by a new one, a dummy cover
must be replaced in the slot to comply with applicable EMC
regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 113

Power supply units

6.2.3 Installing a hot-plug power supply unit

Figure 16: Installing the hot-plug power supply unit

Ê Push the power supply unit into its bay (1) as far as it will go until the release
latch snaps in place (2).
Ê Fold down the handle on the power supply unit(3).
V CAUTION!
Ensure that the power supply unit properly engages in its bay and is
locked in position in order to prevent it from sliding out of the chassis
during transportation.

6.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72

114 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Power supply units

6.3 Removing a hot-plug power supply unit

Customer Replaceable Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(CRU)

Tools: tool-less

I Note for servers using CMA (Cable Management Arm)

Regarding of removing power supply units, additional tasks are needed,
due to an interference between CMA stopper and the power supply units.
Ê Unlock the CMA stopper.
Ê Remove the CMA stopper with the mounted crossbar.
Ê Support the CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA including cables
with your right hand.
Ê Remove the power supply unit and install a dummy cover into the
empty bay.
Ê Remount the complete assembly (CMA stopper, crossbar and CMA)
into the rail.

6.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê Remove the power cord from the dedicated power supply unit as described
in section "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 115

Power supply units

6.3.2 Removing a hot-plug power supply unit

Figure 17: Removing the hot-plug power supply unit

Ê Push the handle of the power supply unit halfway upward in the direction of
the arrow (1).
Ê Push the green release latch in direction of the arrow (2).
Ê While keeping the green release latch pressed, pull the power supply unit
out of its slot (3).
V CAUTION!
Never leave the bay for the power supply unit empty for more than two
minutes during operation. Otherwise, excessive temperatures could
damage system components.

116 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Power supply units

6.3.3 Installing a PSU dummy cover

Figure 18: Installing a dummy cover

Ê Insert the dummy cover into the empty bay with the impressed arrow symbol
facing up (see circle).
Ê Press in on both release latches on the dummy cover until it locks in place.
V CAUTION!
Always install dummy covers into unused bays to comply with
applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

6.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 117

Power supply units

6.4 Replacing a hot-plug power supply unit

Customer Replaceable Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(CRU)

Tools: tool-less

V CAUTION!
● When replacing a power supply unit in a non-redundant power supply
configuration, the server must be switched off first.
● Replace the power supply unit after specifying the one that breaks
down at work by revitalization.
● Ensure to replace a defective power supply unit by a new unit of the
same type.

6.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Locating the defective component" on page 59
Ê In non-redundant power supply configurations, shut down the server as
described in section "Shutting down the server" on page 59.
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60

6.4.2 Removing the defective hot-plug power supply

unit

Ê Remove the defective power supply unit as described in "Removing a hot-

plug power supply unit" on page 116.

6.4.3 Installing the new hot-plug power supply unit

Ê Install the new hot-plug power supply unit as described in section "Installing
a hot-plug power supply unit" on page 114.

118 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Power supply units

6.4.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72

Ê In non-redundant PSU configurations, switch on the server as described in
section "Switching on the server" on page 73.
Ê "Performing a fan test after replacing a defective fan" on page 105

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 119

Power supply units

120 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

7 Hard disk drives / solid state
drives
Safety notes
V CAUTION!
● The hard disk drive must not be removed from the installation frame
by anyone except a service technician.
● HDD / SSD modules must all be marked clearly so that they can be
reinstalled into their original mounting locations after an upgrade.
Otherwise, data may be lost.
● Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the
metallic areas or the edges of the circuit boards.
● Before removing a hard disk drive, wait for about 30 seconds until the
disk has stopped spinning completely.
● When a hard disk drive is starting up, a resonant noise may be
audible for a short while. This does not indicate a failure.
● Depending on the OS, you can configure the write cache settings for
the hard disk drives. If a power failure should occur while the write
cache is enabled, cached data may be lost.
● When disposing of, transferring, or returning a hard disk or solid state
drive, wipe out the data on the drive for your own security.
● Rough handling of hard disk drives may damage the stored data. To
cope with any unexpected problems, always back up important data.
When backing up data to another hard disk drive, you should make
backups on a file or partition basis.
● Handle the device on a shock and vibration free surface.
● Do not use the device in extremely hot or cold locations, or locations
with extreme temperature changes.
● Never attempt to disassemble a hard disk or solid state drive.
● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important
information" on page 45.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 121

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.1 Basic procedures

– Solid state drives (SSDs) are always equipped before installing hard disk
drives.
– Hard disk drives / solid state drives with different capacities are installed
from highest to lowest capacity.
– Hard disk drives with different rotation speeds are installed from highest to
lowest speed.
– When installing hard disk drives with different bus technologies (SAS or
SATA), first install SAS drives and then SATA drives.
– Please refer to sections "Mounting order for 3.5-inch HDDs" on page 122 for
a complete overview of the mounting sequence.
– Install dummy modules into unused HDD bays.
I The mounting order described above is only relevant for the factory
manufacturing process. In case of upgrading a system you need not
consider this mounting sequence.

7.2 3.5-inch cage configurations HDD / SSD

7.2.1 Mounting order for 3.5-inch HDDs

Maximum configuration: 12x 3.5-inch HDDs

Basic information
– If only one HDD module is installed, the HDD module will be installed in
position 1. Empty bays must be equipped with a dummy module.

122 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.2.1.1 HDD mounting order for 4x 3.5-inch HDD configuration

Figure 19: 4x 3.5-inch HDD mounting order

Mounting order
Bay number

ServerView RAID Manager display name

Logical drive (Enclosure number: Port number)
Position
number
one SAS controller
[1] 0 Vendor Product (0)
[2] 1 Vendor Product (1)
[3] 2 Vendor Product (2)
[4] 3 Vendor Product (3)

7.2.1.2 HDD mounting order for 8x 3.5-inch HDD configurations

Figure 20: 8x 3.5-inch HDD mounting order

Mounting order
Bay number

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 123

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

ServerView RAID Manager display name

Logical drive (Enclosure number: Port number)
Position
number
one SAS controller two SAS controllers
[1] 0 Vendor Product (0) Vendor Product (0:0)
[2] 1 Vendor Product (1) Vendor Product (0:1)
[3] 2 Vendor Product (2) Vendor Product (0:2)
[4] 3 Vendor Product (3) Vendor Product (0:3)
[5] 4 Vendor Product (4) Vendor Product (1:0)
[6] 5 Vendor Product (5) Vendor Product (1:1)
[7] 6 Vendor Product (6) Vendor Product (1:2)
[8] 7 Vendor Product (7) Vendor Product (1:3)

7.2.1.3 HDD mounting order for 12x 3.5-inch HDD configurations

Figure 21: 12x 3.5-inch HDD mounting order

Mounting order
Bay number

ServerView RAID Manager display name

Position Logical drive number (Enclosure number: Port number)
one SAS controller
[1] 0 Vendor Product (0)
[2] 1 Vendor Product (1)
[3] 2 Vendor Product (2)
[4] 3 Vendor Product (3)

124 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

ServerView RAID Manager display name

Position Logical drive number (Enclosure number: Port number)
one SAS controller
[5] 4 Vendor Product (4)
[6] 5 Vendor Product (5)
[7] 6 Vendor Product (6)
[8] 7 Vendor Product (7)
[9] 8 Vendor Product (8)
[10] 9 Vendor Product (9)
[11] 10 Vendor Product (10)
[12] 11 Vendor Product (11)

7.2.2 Installing 3.5-inch HDD modules

Customer Replaceable Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(CRU)

Tools: tool-less

7.2.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê Locate the correct drive bay as described in section "3.5-inch cage

configurations HDD / SSD" on page 122.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 125

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.2.2.2 Removing a 3.5-inch dummy module

Figure 22: Removing a 3.5-inch dummy module

I Dummy modules have been installed into unused HDD bays. Before
installing an additional HDD, the dummy module needs to be removed
from the desired drive bay.
Ê Carefully remove the lock (1).
I Remove only locks when you upgrade the server. In bays with locks
are no backplanes installed. So you can not connect a HDD/SSD to
the server without installing a backplane.
Ê Press on the locking tabs on both sides of the dummy module to disengage
the locking mechanism (2).
Ê While keeping the locking tabs pressed, pull the dummy module out of its
bay (3).
V CAUTION!
Save the dummy module for future use.
Always replace dummy modules into unused HDD bays to comply
with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

126 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.2.2.3 Installing a 3.5-inch HDD module

Figure 23: Opening the 3.5-inch HDD module locking lever

Ê While pressing on the locking button (1) fold up the lever (2).

Figure 24: Inserting the 3.5-inch HDD module

Ê Insert the HDD module into a drive bay and carefully push back as far as it
will go (1).
Ê Fold back the lever to lock the HDD module in place (2).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 127

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.2.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Performing a RAID array rebuild" on page 100

7.2.3 Removing 3.5-inch HDD modules

Customer Replaceable Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(CRU)

Tools: tool-less

7.2.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê If the HDD module to be removed is combined into a RAID array, please

proceed as follows:

RAID level Procedure

Only remove an HDD module combined in a RAID 0
array if defective.
RAID 0 V CAUTION!
Removing an operational HDD module will
result in data loss!
Removing an HDD module from a RAID 1 or RAID 5
array will not result in data loss.
However, the removed drive needs to be replaced
RAID 1 immediately by an HDD module of the same or larger
capacity.
RAID 5
I After replacing the HDD module, RAID rebuild
will be performed as a background process as
described in section "Performing a RAID array
rebuild" on page 100.

In order to permanently remove an operational HDD module that is part of a

RAID array from the server, you first need to delete the array using
ServerView RAID Manager or BIOS Utility.

128 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

V CAUTION!
All data on all HDDs in the array will be lost! Be sure to back up your
data before deleting a RAID array.
I For further information, please refer to the "ServerView Suite RAID
Management" user guide and manuals of RAID controller.

7.2.3.2 Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module

Figure 25: Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module

Ê Press the green locking clip (1) and fully open the locking lever (2).
I Thereby, the HDD module is pushed out of its drive bay by about 1 cm
and disconnected from the SAS / SATA backplane.
Ê Wait about 30 seconds to allow the hard disk drive to spin down.
Ê Pull the HDD module completely out of its bay (3).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 129

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.2.3.3 Installing a 3.5-inch dummy module

V CAUTION!
If the removed HDD module is not replaced immediately, always replace
a dummy module into the unused HDD bay to comply with applicable
EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

Figure 26: Installing a 3.5-inch dummy module

Ê Slide the 3.5-inch dummy module into the drive bay until it locks in place (1).
Ê Insert the lock (2).
I Insert the lock only when there is no backplane behind this bay.
7.2.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Performing a RAID array rebuild" on page 100

130 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.2.4 Replacing a 3.5-inch HDD module

Customer Replaceable Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(CRU)

Tools: tool-less

V CAUTION!
● Only remove an HDD / SSD module during operation if the drive is
not currently being accessed. Observe the indicators on the HDD
module, as described in the operating manual of your server.
● Under no circumstances should you remove an HDD / SSD module
while the system is in operation if you are not sure that the drive is
operated by a RAID controller and belongs to a disk array that is
operating in RAID level 0, 1, 1E, 10, 5, 50, 6 or 60.
An HDD / SSD module can only be replaced during operation in
conjunction with a corresponding RAID configuration.
● All HDD / SSD modules (drives) must be uniquely identified so that
they can be reinstalled in their original mounting locations later. If this
is not done, existing data can be lost.

7.2.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê Locate the defective HDD module as described in section "Local diagnostic
indicators on the front" on page 59.

Only applicable for removing intact HDD modules:

Ê Before removing a non-defective HDD module, put the drive into "Offline"
mode using your RAID configuration software.
I For further information, please refer to the "ServerView Suite RAID
Management" user guide and manuals of RAID controller.

7.2.4.2 Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module

Ê "Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module" on page 129

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 131

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.2.4.3 Installing a 3.5-inch HDD module

Ê "Installing 3.5-inch HDD modules" on page 125

7.2.4.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Performing a RAID array rebuild" on page 100

7.2.5 2.5-inch HDDS / SSD in a 3.5-inch installation

frame

Customer Replaceable Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(CRU)

Tools: Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver

I In order to use 2.5-inch HDD / SSD, you can install a 2.5-inch

HDD / SSD in the 3.5-inch installation frame.

7.2.5.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module" on page 129

7.2.5.2 Installing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD into a 3.5-inch installation frame

I In order to use 2.5-inch HDD / SSD, you can install a 2.5-inch

HDD / SSD in the 3.5-inch installation frame.

132 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 27: 2.5-inch HDD module and 3.5-inch installation frame

Ê Lay the 2.5-inch HDD into the 3.5-inch HDD installation frame as shown.

Figure 28: Installing the 2.5-inch HDD in the 3.5-inch frame (A)

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 133

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 29: Installing the 2.5-inch HDD in the 3.5-inch frame (B)

Ê Fasten the 2.5-inch HDD with four screws.

134 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.2.5.3 Removing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD out of a 3.5-inch installation

frame

Figure 30: Removing the 2.5-inch HDD from the 3.5-inch frame (A)

Ê Remove four screws.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 135

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 31: Removing the 2.5-inch HDD from the 3.5-inch frame (B)

Ê Turn the installation frame round while holding the 2.5-inch HDD in place.
Ê Lift the 2.5-inch HDD out of the 3.5-inch HDD installation frame.

7.2.5.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing 3.5-inch HDD modules" on page 125

136 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.3 Replacing 3.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS/SATA

backplanes

7.3.1 Replacing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplanes

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: Phillips PZ2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

7.3.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê Remove all HDD / SSD modules from the server as described in section
"Removing 3.5-inch HDD modules" on page 128.
V CAUTION!
Ensure that all hard disk drives are uniquely identified so that you can
reinsert them into their original bays after replacing the HDD
backplane.
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 137

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.3.1.2 Removing the 4x 3.5-inch SAS HDD backplane 1

Figure 32: Disconnecting cables from the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Ê Disconnect all cables from the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 1:

– SAS / SATA cable (1)
– Power cable (2)
– If applicable OOB cable (3)
– If applicable ODD power cable (4)
Ê Remove the three screws.

138 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 33: Removing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane (A)

Ê Tilt out the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 1.

I Take care that the OOB connector will not be damaged!

Figure 34: Removing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane (B)

Ê Remove the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 1.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 139

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.3.1.3 Installing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 1

Figure 35: Jumper on a 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

I If there is a jumper installed on the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane,

remove 2-pins connector X13 (part number of backplane:
A3C40173250).

Figure 36: Installing the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 1

140 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Ê At a slight angle insert the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 1 between the
punching and the centering pin.
I Take care that the OOB connector will not be damaged!
Ê Fold back the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 1.

Figure 37: Installing the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 1

Ê Regard the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane is seated in the recesses (2) and
centering pins (1).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 141

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 38: Connecting cables to the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Ê Connect all cables to the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane:

– Power cable (1)
– SAS cable (2)
– If applicable OOB cable (3)
Ê Fasten the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 1 with the three screws.
I For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section "List of used
cables" on page 547.

142 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.3.1.4 Removing the 4x 3.5-inch SAS HDD backplane 2

Figure 39: Disconnecting cables from the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Ê Disconnect all cables from the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 2:

– SAS / SATA cable (1)
– Power cable (2)
– If applicable OOB cable (3)
Ê Remove the three screws.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 143

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 40: Removing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 2

Ê Remove the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 2.

I Take care that the OOB connector will not be damaged!
7.3.1.5 Installing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 2

Figure 41: Jumper on the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

144 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

I If there is a jumper installed on the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane,

remove 2-pins connector X13 (part number of backplane
A3C40173250).

Figure 42: Installing the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 2

Ê At a slight angle insert the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 2 between the
punching and the centering pin. See section "Installing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD
SAS backplane 1" on page 140.
Ê Fold back the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 2.
I Take care that the OOB connector will not be damaged!

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 145

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 43: Installing the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 2

Ê Connect all cables to the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 2:

– Power cable (1)
– SAS cable (2)
– If applicable, OOB cable (3)
Ê Fasten the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 3 with the screw.
I For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section "List of used
cables" on page 547.

7.3.1.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Installing 3.5-inch HDD modules" on page 125
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

146 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.3.2 Upgrading SAS / SATA HDD backplane 2

7.3.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

7.3.2.2 Installing the 3.5-inch HDD backplane 2

Ê "Installing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane 2" on page 144

7.3.2.3 Connecting the SAS cables

Onboard SAS

Figure 44: Connecting the 3.5-inch HDD backplane 2 to the system board

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 147

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Ê Connect the SAS cable of 3.5-inch HDD backplane 2 to the system board
connector SATA 7-10).

RAID controller

Figure 45: Connecting the 3.5-inch HDD backplane 2 to the RAID controller

Ê Connect the SAS cable of 3.5-inch HDD backplane to the RAID controller.

7.3.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Installing 3.5-inch HDD modules" on page 125
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

148 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.3.3 Replacing the 12x 3.5-inch HDD backplane

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 15 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: Phillips PZ2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

7.3.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê Remove all HDD / SSD modules from the server as described in section
"Removing 3.5-inch HDD modules" on page 128.
V CAUTION!
Ensure that all hard disk drives are uniquely identified so that you can
reinsert them into their original bays after replacing the HDD
backplane.
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 149

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.3.3.2 Removing the SAS expander board

Figure 46: Disconnecting SAS cables

Ê Disconnect the two SAS cables from the SAS expander board (1, 2).
Ê If applicable, disconnect the OOB cable from the backplane (3).

Figure 47: Removing the expander holder (A)

Ê Remove the screw from the expander holder (see circle).

150 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 48: Removing the expander holder (B)

Ê Disconnect the connector card from the three connectors of the HDD
backplane (see circles) and remove it.
I Lift up the expander holder and take care of the stand-off in the
chassis.

7.3.3.3 Removing the defective 12x 3.5-inch HDD backplane

햲 햳

Figure 49: Disconnecting power cables from the HDD backplane

Ê Disconnect the two power cables from the HDD backplane (1, 2).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 151

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 50: Removing the 12x 3.5-inch HDD backplane

Ê Remove the four screws (see circles).

Ê Take out the HDD backplane at a slight angle (45°).

7.3.3.4 Installing the new 12x 3.5-inch HDD backplane

Figure 51: Installing the 12x 3.5-inch HDD backplane (A)

Ê Position the HDD backplane behind the four stampings into the chassis (see
circles).

152 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 52: Installing the 12x 3.5-inch HDD backplane (B)

Ê Fasten the HDD backplane with 4 screws (see circles).

햲 햳

Figure 53: Connecting power cables to the HDD backplane

Ê Connect the two power cables to the HDD backplane:

– Power cable from the connector PWR 12V 1 on the system board to the
connector X41 on the HDD backplane (1).
– Power cable from the connector PWR 12V 2 on the system board to the
connector X40 on the HDD backplane (2).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 153

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.3.3.5 Installing the SAS expander board

Figure 54: Installing the assembled expander holder (A)

Ê Insert the connector card into the three connectors of the HDD backplane
(see circles).
I Lift up the expander holder and take care of the stand-off in the
chassis.

Figure 55: Installing the expander holder (B)

Ê Fasten the expander holder with one screw (see circle).

154 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 56: Connecting cables to the expander board and backplane

Figure 57: Connecting SAS cables to the system board

Ê Connect the two SAS cables to the SAS expander board:

– (1) from SAS controller connector MLC1 to SAS expander board
– (2) from SAS controller connector MLC2 to SAS expander board
Ê (3) If applicable, connect the OOB cable to the backplane.

7.3.3.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 155

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Ê Insert all HDD/SSD modules, see section "Installing 3.5-inch HDD modules"
on page 125.
I Make sure that you reinstall the HDD/SSD module in the bay it was
located before the HDD backplane replacement.
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

7.3.4 Replacing the SAS expander board

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: Phillips PZ2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

7.3.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

7.3.4.2 Removing the expander holder

Ê Remove the expander holder as described in section "Removing the SAS

expander board" on page 150.

156 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.3.4.3 Removing the defective SAS expander board

Figure 58: Removing the pre-mounted expander board (A)

Ê Remove the two screws (see circles).

Figure 59: Removing the pre-mounted expander board (B)

Ê Remove the pre-mounted SAS expander board.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 157

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 60: Disconnecting the connector card

Ê Disconnect the connector card from the SAS expander board.

158 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.3.4.4 Installing the new SAS expander board

Figure 61: Connecting the connector card

Ê Connect the connector card with the SAS expander board.

Figure 62: Installing the pre-mounted expander board

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 159

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Ê Position the pre-mounted expander board in the two recesses (see circles)
of the expander holder (1).
Ê Push the pre-mounted expander board on the expander holder (2).

Figure 63: Installing the expander board (C)

Ê Match the two screw holes of the connector card with the holes in the
expander holder.
Ê Fasten the pre-mounted expander board with two screws on the expander
holder (see circles).

7.3.4.5 Installing the SAS expander board

Ê Install the SAS expander board as described in section "Installing the SAS
expander board" on page 154.

7.3.4.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

160 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.3.5 Replacing the connector card

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: Phillips PZ2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

7.3.5.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

7.3.5.2 Removing the SAS expander board

Ê Remove the assembled expander holder as described in section "Removing

the SAS expander board" on page 150.

7.3.5.3 Removing the defective connector card

Figure 64: Removing the connector card

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 161

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Ê Remove the two screws (see circles).

Ê Disconnect the connector card from the SAS expander board.

7.3.5.4 Installing the new connector card

Figure 65: Installing the connector card

Ê Match the two screw holes of the connector card with the holes in the
expander holder.
Ê Fasten the pre-mounted expander board with two screws on the expander
holder (see circles).

7.3.5.5 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

162 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.4 2.5-inch HDD/SSD configurations

7.4.1 Mounting order for 2.5-inch HDDs/SSDs

Maximum configuration: 24x 2.5-inch HDDs

Basic information
– If only one HDD module is installed, the HDD module will be installed in
position 1. Empty bays must be equipped with a dummy module.
– It is necessary to install dummy locks to all unused HDD bays (eight pieces).

7.4.1.1 HDD mounting order for 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD configuration

Figure 66: 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD mounting order

Mounting order
Bay number

ServerView RAID Manager display name

Logical drive (Enclosure number: Port number)
Position
number
one SAS contoller
[1] 0 Vendor Product (0)
[2] 1 Vendor Product (1)
[3] 2 Vendor Product (2)
[4] 3 Vendor Product (3)

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 163

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

ServerView RAID Manager display name

Logical drive (Enclosure number: Port number)
Position
number
one SAS contoller
[5] 4 Vendor Product (4)
[6] 5 Vendor Product (5)
[7] 6 Vendor Product (6)
[8] 7 Vendor Product (7)

7.4.1.2 HDD mounting order for 16x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD configuration

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Figure 67: 16x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD mounting order

Mounting order
Bay number

ServerView RAID Manager display name

Position Logical drive number (Enclosure number: Port number)
one SAS controller two SAS controllers
[1] 0 Vendor Product (0) Vendor Product (0:0)
[2] 1 Vendor Product (1) Vendor Product (0:1)
[3] 2 Vendor Product (2) Vendor Product (0:2)
[4] 3 Vendor Product (3) Vendor Product (0:3)
[5] 4 Vendor Product (4) Vendor Product (0:4)
[6] 5 Vendor Product (5) Vendor Product (0:5)
[7] 6 Vendor Product (6) Vendor Product (0:6)
[8] 7 Vendor Product (7) Vendor Product (0:7)

164 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

ServerView RAID Manager display name

Position Logical drive number (Enclosure number: Port number)
one SAS controller two SAS controllers
[9] 8 Vendor Product (8) Vendor Product (1:0)
[10] 9 Vendor Product (9) Vendor Product (1:1)
[11] 10 Vendor Product (10) Vendor Product (1:2)
[12] 11 Vendor Product (11) Vendor Product (1:3)
[13] 12 Vendor Product (12) Vendor Product (1:4)
[14] 13 Vendor Product (13) Vendor Product (1:5)
[15] 14 Vendor Product (14) Vendor Product (1:6)
[16] 15 Vendor Product (15) Vendor Product (1:7)

7.4.1.3 HDD mounting order for 24x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD configuration

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
쎻 쎻 쎻 쎻

Figure 68: 24x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD mounting order

Mounting order
Bay number

ServerView RAID Manager display name

Logical drive
Position (Enclosure number: Port number)
number
one SAS controller and expander board
[1] 0 Vendor Product (1:0)
[2] 1 Vendor Product (1:1)
[3] 2 Vendor Product (1:2)
[4] 3 Vendor Product (1:3)

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 165

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

ServerView RAID Manager display name

Logical drive
Position (Enclosure number: Port number)
number
one SAS controller and expander board
[5] 4 Vendor Product (1:4)
[6] 5 Vendor Product (1:5)
[7] 6 Vendor Product (1:6)
[8] 7 Vendor Product (1:7)
[9] 8 Vendor Product (1:8)
[10] 9 Vendor Product (1:9)
[11] 10 Vendor Product (1:10)
[12] 11 Vendor Product (1:11)
[13] 12 Vendor Product (1:12)
[14] 13 Vendor Product (1:13)
[15] 14 Vendor Product (1:14)
[16] 15 Vendor Product (1:15)
[17] 16 Vendor Product (1:16)
[18] 17 Vendor Product (1:17)
[19] 18 Vendor Product (1:18)
[20] 19 Vendor Product (1:19)
[21] 20 Vendor Product (1:20)
[22] 21 Vendor Product (1:21)
[23] 22 Vendor Product (1:22)
[24] 23 Vendor Product (1:23)

7.4.1.4 HDD mounting order for additional 4x PCIe SSD SFFs accessible
from the front side

Figure 69: 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSDs front

166 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Mounting order
Bay number

Position Logical drive ServerView RAID Manager display name

number (Enclosure number: Port number)
one SAS controller
[1] 0 Vendor Product (1:0)
[2] 1 Vendor Product (1:1)
[3] 2 Vendor Product (1:2)
[4] 3 Vendor Product (1:3)

7.4.1.5 HDD mounting order for 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSDs or PCIe

SSDs accessible from the rear side

I Two configurations are available:

– 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSDs connected to a SAS3.0 controller
– 4x PCIe SSD SFFs connected to a PCIe switch

Figure 70: 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSDs or PCIe SSDs rear

Mounting order
Bay number

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 167

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Position Logical drive ServerView RAID Manager display name

number (Enclosure number: Port number)
one SAS controller
[1] 0 Vendor Product (1:0)
[2] 1 Vendor Product (1:1)
[3] 2 Vendor Product (1:2)
[4] 3 Vendor Product (1:3)

168 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.4.2 Installing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules

Customer Replaceable Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(CRU)

Tools: tool-less

7.4.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê Locate the correct drive bay as described in section "2.5-inch HDD/SSD

configurations" on page 163.

7.4.2.2 Removing a 2.5-inch dummy module

Figure 71: Removing a 2.5-inch dummy module

I Dummy modules have been installed into unused HDD / SSD bays.
Before installing an additional HDD / SSD, the dummy module needs to
be removed from the desired drive bay.
Ê Press on the locking clips of the dummy module to disengage the locking
mechanism (1).
Ê While keeping the locking clip pressed, pull the dummy module out of its bay
(2).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 169

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

V CAUTION!
Save the dummy module for future use.
Always replace dummy modules into unused HDD / SSD bays to
comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling
requirements.

7.4.2.3 Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

Figure 72: Unlocking a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

Ê Undo the locking mechanism of the release lever (1).

Ê Swing the release lever in the direction of the arrow (2).

170 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 73: Inserting the 2.5-inch HDD module

Ê Insert the HDD / SSD module into a drive bay and carefully push back as far
as it will go (1).
Ê Close the locking lever in the direction of the arrow until it engages (2).

7.4.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Performing a RAID array rebuild" on page 100

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 171

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.4.3 Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules

Customer Replaceable Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(CRU)

Tools: tool-less

7.4.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê If the HDD module to be removed is combined into a RAID array, please

proceed as follows:

RAID level Procedure

Only remove an HDD module combined in a RAID 0
array if defective.
RAID 0 V CAUTION!
Removing an operational HDD module will
result in data loss!
Removing an HDD module from a RAID 1 or RAID 5
array will not result in data loss.
However, the removed drive needs to be replaced
RAID 1 immediately by an HDD module of the same or larger
capacity.
RAID 5
I After replacing the HDD module, RAID rebuild
will be performed as a background process as
described in section "Performing a RAID array
rebuild" on page 100.

In order to permanently remove an operational HDD module that is part of a

RAID array from the server, you first need to delete the array using
ServerView RAID Manager or BIOS Utility.
V CAUTION!
All data on all HDDs/SSDs in the array will be lost! Be sure to back up
your data before deleting a RAID array.

172 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

I For further information, please refer to the "ServerView Suite RAID

Management" user guide and manuals of RAID controller.

7.4.3.2 Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

Figure 74: Removing a 2.5-inch HDD module

Ê Undo the locking mechanism of the release lever (1).

Ê Swing the release lever in the direction of the arrow (2).
Ê Pull out the HDD/SSD (3).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 173

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.4.3.3 Installing a 2.5-inch dummy module

V CAUTION!
If the removed HDD/SSD module is not replaced immediately, always
replace a dummy module into the unused HDD/SSD bay to comply with
applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

Figure 75: Installing a 2.5-inch dummy module

Ê Slide the dummy module into the drive bay until it locks in place.

Figure 76: Installing dummy lock

I For 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD version and 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD + 4x PCIe

SSD it is necessary to install the dummy locks to all unused HDDs bays
that means without a backplane behind the bay (8 pieces or 4 pieces).

174 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.4.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Performing a RAID array rebuild" on page 100

7.4.4 Replacing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

Customer Replaceable Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(CRU)

Tools: tool-less

V CAUTION!
● Only remove an HDD / SSD module during operation if the drive is
not currently being accessed. Observe the indicators on the HDD
module, as described in the operating manual of your server.
● Under no circumstances should you remove an HDD / SSD module
while the system is in operation if you are not sure that the drive is
operated by a RAID controller and belongs to a disk array that is
operating in RAID level 0, 1, 1E, 10, 5, 50, 6 or 60.
An HDD / SSD module can only be replaced during operation in
conjunction with a corresponding RAID configuration.
● All HDD / SSD modules (drives) must be uniquely identified so that
they can be reinstalled in their original mounting locations later. If this
is not done, existing data can be lost.

7.4.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê Locate the defective HDD/SSD module as described in section "Local
diagnostic indicators on the front" on page 59.

Only applicable for removing intact HDD/SSD modules:

Ê Before removing a non-defective HDD/SSD module, put the drive into
"Offline" mode using your RAID configuration software.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 175

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

I For further information, please refer to the "ServerView Suite RAID

Management" user guide and manuals of RAID controller.

7.4.4.2 Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

Ê "Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module" on page 176

7.4.4.3 Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

Ê "Installing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 169

7.4.4.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Performing a RAID array rebuild" on page 100

176 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.5 Replacing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS/SATA

backplanes

7.5.1 Replacing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS

backplane 1

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 15 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: tool-less

7.5.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê Remove all HDD / SSD modules from the server as described in section
"Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 172.
V CAUTION!
Ensure that all hard disk drives are uniquely identified so that you can
reinsert them into their original bays after replacing the HDD
backplane.
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382
Ê If applicable, "Removing the expander holder" on page 195.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 177

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.5.1.2 Disconnecting cables from backplane

Figure 77: Disconnecting cables from backplane 1 (model without expander board)

Figure 78: Disconnecting cables from backplane (model with expander board)

Ê Disconnect all cables from the backplane:

– SAS / SATA cables (1, 2)
– Power cable (3)
– ODD power cable (4)
– If applicable OOB cable (5)

178 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.5.1.3 Removing the backplane

Figure 79: Removing the 8x 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSD backplane

Ê Press down the two hooks (1) with a screw driver and tilt out the
backplane (2).
Ê Remove the backplane.

7.5.1.4 Installing the backplane

Figure 80: Recesses at the top for the 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSD backplane

Ê Regard the six recesses at the top.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 179

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 81: Installing the 8x 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSD backplane

Ê At a slight angle insert the backplane in the six recesses (see figure 80 on
page 179) at the top.
Ê Fold back the backplane on the bottom (1) until it rests in the two hooks (2).

7.5.1.5 Connecting cables to backplane 1

Configuration without expander board

SAS MCL 1
SAS MCL 2

Figure 82: Connecting cables with SAS controller

180 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

SATA 7-10
SATA 1-4

Figure 83: Connecting cables with onboard controller

Ê Connect the two SAS cables to the backplane:

– (1) from SAS controller connector MLC1 or from system board connector
SATA 1-4
– (2) from SAS controller connector MLC2 or from system board connector
SATA 7-10
Ê Connect power cables to the backplane:
– Power cable (3)
– If applicable ODD power cable (4)
– If applicable OOB cable (5)

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 181

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Configuration with expander board

Figure 84: Connecting cables to the backplane

Ê Connect the two SAS cables to backplane 1:

– Cable T26139-Y4040-V31 to backplane connector X10 (1)
– Cable T26139-Y4040-V33 to backplane connector X9 (2)
Ê Connect power cables to the backplane:
– Power cable to (3)
– ODD power cable (4)
– If applicable OOB cable (5)
I For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section "List of used
cables" on page 547.

7.5.1.6 Concluding steps

Ê If applicable, "Installing the expander holder" on page 197

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384
Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Installing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 169
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

182 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.5.2 Replacing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS

backplane 2/3

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 15 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: tool-less

7.5.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê Remove all HDD / SSD modules from the server as described in section
"Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 172.
V CAUTION!
Ensure that all hard disk drives are uniquely identified so that you can
reinsert them into their original bays after replacing the HDD
backplane.
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382
Ê If applicable, "Removing the expander holder" on page 195.

7.5.2.2 Disconnecting cables from the backplane

Ê Disconnect all cables from the backplane as described in section

"Disconnecting cables from backplane" on page 178.

7.5.2.3 Removing the backplane

Ê Remove the backplane as described in section "Removing the backplane"

on page 179.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 183

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.5.2.4 Installing the backplane

Ê Install the backplane as described in section "Installing the backplane" on

page 179.

7.5.2.5 Connecting cables to backplane 2/3

Configuration without expander board

SA AS M
S M LC
S

LC 2
1

Controller 2
Figure 85: Connecting cables with SAS controller 2

Ê Connect the two SAS cables to the backplane 2:

– (1) from SAS controller 2 connector MLC1
– (2) from SAS controller 2 connector MLC2
Ê Connect power cables to the backplane:
– Power cable (3)
– If applicable ODD power cable (4)
– If applicable OOB cable (5)
Ê Route the cables as shown.

184 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Configuration with expander board

Figure 86: Connecting cables to backplane 2

Figure 87: Connecting cables to backplane 3

Ê If applicable, connect the two SAS cables to the backplane 2, see figure 86
on page 185:
– Cable T26139-Y4040-V30 to backplane connector X10, X9 (1, 2)
Ê If applicable, connect the two SAS cables to the backplane 3, see figure 87
on page 185:
– Cable T26139-Y4040-V32 to backplane connector X10 (1)
– Cable T26139-Y4040-V31 to backplane connector X9 (2)

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 185

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Ê Connect power cables to the backplane:

– Power cable to (3)
– If applicable, ODD power cable (4)
– If applicable OOB cable (5)
I For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section "List of used
cables" on page 547.

7.5.2.6 Concluding steps

Ê If applicable, "Installing the expander holder" on page 197

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384
Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Installing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 169
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

7.5.3 Upgrading the 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD (front side)

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: tool-less

7.5.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê Remove all SSD modules from the server front as described in section
"Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 172.

186 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

V CAUTION!
Ensure that all hard disk drives are uniquely identified so that you can
reinsert them into their original bays after replacing the HDD
backplane.
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

7.5.3.2 Installing the 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD

Figure 88: Recesses at the top for the 2.5-inch PCIe backplane

Ê Regard the three recesses at the top.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 187

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 89: Installing the PCIe backplane

Ê At a slight angle insert the backplane in the three recesses (see figure 88 on
page 187) at the top.
Ê Fold back the backplane on the bottom until it rests in the hook.

7.5.3.3 Connecting cables to PCIe backplane

Figure 90: Connecting cables to the PCIe backplane

188 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Ê Connect power cable C37 (1) to the PCIe backplane.

Ê Connect power cable C37 to system board connector PWR 12V 2.
Ê Connect the cable bundle C36 to the PCIe backplane:
– (2) plug P0 (black) to connector P0-X1 on PCIe backplane
– (3) plug P1 (red) to connector P1-X2 on PCIe backplane
– (4) plug P2 (yellow) to connector P2-X3 on PCIe backplane
– (5) plug P3 (green) to connector P3-X4 on PCIe backplane

7.5.3.4 Connecting cables to the PCIe switch

Figure 91: Connecting cables to the PCIe switch

Ê Install the PCIe switch see section "Standard expansion cards" on page 234.
Ê Connect the cable bundle C36 to the PCIe switch:
– (1) Connector P0 (black) to connector P0-X1 on PCIe switch
– (2) Connector P1 (red) to connector P1-X2 on PCIe switch
– (3) Connector P2 (yellow) to connector P2-X3 on PCIe switch
– (4) Connector P3 (green) to connector P3-X4 on PCIe switch

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 189

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.5.3.5 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Installing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 169
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

7.5.4 Replacing the 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: tool-less

7.5.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê Remove all SSD modules from the server front as described in section
"Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 172.
V CAUTION!
Ensure that all hard disk drives are uniquely identified so that you can
reinsert them into their original bays after replacing the HDD
backplane.
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

190 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.5.4.2 Removing cables from PCIe backplane

Figure 92: Disconnecting cables to the PCIe backplane

Ê Disconnect power cable C37 (1) from the PCIe backplane.

Ê Disconnect the cable bundle C36 from the PCIe backplane:
– (2) Connector P0 (black) from connector P0-X1 on PCIe backplane
– (3) Connector P1 (red) from connector P1-X2 on PCIe backplane
– (4) ConnectorP2 (yellow) from connector P2-X3 on PCIe backplane
– (5) Connector P3 (green) from connector P3-X4 on PCIe backplane

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 191

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.5.4.3 Removing the 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD

Figure 93: Installing the the PCIe backplane

Ê Press down the locking latch to unlock the PCIe backplane (1).
Ê Remove the PCIe backplane (2).
Ê Release the PCIe backplane from the three recesses on the top.

7.5.4.4 Installing the PCIe backplane

Ê "Installing the 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD" on page 187

Ê "Connecting cables to PCIe backplane" on page 188

7.5.4.5 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Installing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 169
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

192 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.5.5 Upgrading up to 24x 2.5-inch HDDs/SSDs

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: tool-less

7.5.5.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê Remove all HDD / SSD modules from the server as described in section
"Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 172.
V CAUTION!
Ensure that all hard disk drives are uniquely identified so that you can
reinsert them into their original bays after replacing the HDD
backplane.
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

7.5.5.2 Installing the second/third SAS backplane

Ê If applicable, remove the expander holder as described in section

"Removing the expander holder" on page 195.
Ê Install the second/third backplane as described in section "Installing the
backplane" on page 179.
Ê If applicable, connect the power cable to system board connector PWR
12V2 (backplane 2).
Ê If applicable, connect the power cable to system board connector PWR
12V3 (backplane 3).
Ê If applicable, connect the two SAS cables to the SAS controller 2 connectors
MLC1 and MLC2.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 193

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Ê Connect the cables to the second/third backplane as described in section

"Connecting cables to backplane 2/3" on page 184.
Ê If applicable, install the expander board as described in section "Installing
the SAS expander board" on page 196.
Ê If applicable, install the expander holder as described in section "Installing
the expander holder" on page 197.

7.5.5.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Installing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 169
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

7.5.6 Replacing the SAS expander board

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: Phillips PZ2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

7.5.6.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

194 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.5.6.2 Removing the expander holder

Ê Disconnect all cables from the SAS expander board.

Figure 94: Removing the expander holder

Ê Loosen the screw (1) and remove the screw (2).

Ê Take off the expander holder from of the chassis.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 195

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.5.6.3 Removing the SAS expander board

Figure 95: Removing the SAS expander board

Ê Remove one screw (see circle).

Ê Push the SAS expander board in the direction of the arrow.
Ê Take off the SAS expander board from the expander holder.

7.5.6.4 Installing the SAS expander board

Figure 96: Positioning the SAS expander board

Ê Position the SAS expander board on the expander holder (see circles).

196 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 97: Installing the SAS expander board

Ê Push the SAS expander board in the direction of the arrow.

Ê Fasten the SAS expander board with one screw (see circle).

7.5.6.5 Installing the expander holder

Figure 98: Installing the expander holder

Ê Slide the expander holder in the chassis until the recess fits under the screw
(1).
Ê Fasten the expander holder with the two screws (1, 2).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 197

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 99: Connecting cables to expander board

Ê Connect SAS cables to the expander board:

– (1) from backplane 1 connector X9 to expander board connector X10
– (2) from backplane 1 connector X10 to expander board connector X11
– (3) from backplane 2 connector X9 to expander board connector X12
– (4) from backplane 2 connector X10 to expander board connector X13
– (5) if applicable, from backplane 3 connector X9 to expander board
connector X14
– (6) if applicable, from backplane 3 connector X10 to expander board
connector X15
Ê Connect the power cable to expander board connector X3 (7).

198 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

SAS MLC1
SAS MLC2

Figure 100: Connecting cables from expander board to controller

Ê Connect the two SAS cables to the SAS expander board:

– (1) from SAS controller connector MLC1 to SAS expander board X1
– (2) from SAS controller connector MLC2 to SAS expander board X2

7.5.6.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 199

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.6 Rear HDD/SSD or PCIe SSD extension box

7.6.1 Replacing the backplane of the extension box

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: Phillips PZ2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

7.6.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê Remove all HDD / SSD modules from the rear side (see figure 70 on
page 167) as described in section "Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules"
on page 172.
V CAUTION!
Ensure that all hard disk drives are uniquely identified so that you can
reinsert them into their original bays after replacing the HDD
backplane.
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

200 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.6.1.2 Disconnecting cables from the rear backplane

Figure 101: Disconnecting cables from the 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSD backplane rear

Figure 102: Disconnecting cables from the PCIe SSD backplane rear

Ê Disconnect all cables from the backplane:

– data cable(s), SAS or PCIe cables(1)
– Power cable (2)

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 201

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.6.1.3 Removing the rear backplane

Figure 103: Removing the SAS HDD/SSD backplane rear

Ê Remove the screw (see circle) and the fixing clip.

Ê Take the backplane out of the rear HDD cage (see arrow).

7.6.1.4 Installing the rear backplane

Figure 104: Installing the 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSD backplane rear (A)

Ê Position the backplane behind the two hooks (see circles).

202 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 105: Installing the 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSD backplane rear (B)

Ê Position the clip and fasten it with one screw (see circle).

7.6.1.5 Connecting cables to the rear backplane

Figure 106: Connecting cables to the 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSD backplane rear

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 203

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 107: Connecting cables to the PCIe SSD backplane rear

Ê Connect the power cable (2) to the backplane.

Ê Connect the data cable(s) to the backplane
I For PCIe cable:

Plug Connector on bpl Color

P0 X1 black
P1 X2 red
P2 X3 yellow
P3 X4 green

I For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section "List of used

cables" on page 547.

7.6.1.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Installing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 169, see also figure 70 on
page 167
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72

204 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

7.6.2 Upgrading a rear extension box

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: Phillips PZ2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

7.6.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê Remove all HDD / SSD modules from the rear side (see figure 70 on
page 167) as described in section "Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules"
on page 172.
V CAUTION!
Ensure that all hard disk drives are uniquely identified so that you can
reinsert them into their original bays after replacing the HDD
backplane.
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 205

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.6.2.2 Removing the rear air grid (left hand)

Figure 108: Removing the rear air grid

Ê Remove three screws (see circles).

Ê Remove the rear air grid.
V CAUTION!
Keep the rear air grid for further use.
Always replace rear air grids into unused installation locations to
comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling
requirements.

206 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.6.2.3 Installing the rear HDD cage

Figure 109: Positioning the rear HDD cage

Ê Position and align the rear HDD cage into the chassis (1).
Ê Push the rear HDD cage in the direction of the arrow (2).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 207

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 110: Rear HDD cage - 3 screws on the top

Ê Fasten the rear HDD cage with 3 screws on the top (see circles).

Figure 111: Rear HDD cage - 2 screws on the side

Ê Fasten the rear HDD cage with 2 screws on the side (see circles).

208 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.6.2.4 Installing the rear backplane

Ê Install the rear backplane as described in section "Installing the rear

backplane" on page 202.

7.6.2.5 Connecting cables to the rear backplane

Ê "Connecting cables to the rear backplane" on page 203.

I For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section "Configuration
4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSD rear" on page 559 or "Configuration 4x 2.5-
inch PCIe SSD rear" on page 559.

Connecting cables from 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSD backplane rear to the

SAS controller

Figure 112: Connecting cables to SAS controller

Ê Connect all cables:

– SAS cable from backplane connector X5 (1) to the SAS controller
connector MLC1 (1).
– Power cable from backplane connector X10 (2) to system board
connector PWR 12V 4 (2).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 209

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Connecting cables from PCIe SSD backplane rear to the PCIe switch

Figure 113: Connecting cables from the 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSD backplane rear

Ê Connect the power cable from backplane connector X12 (1) to system board
connector PWR 12V 4.
Ê Connect the cables of the cable bundle (2).

Color PCIe SSD backplane PCIe switch

Plug Connector Plug Connector
black P0 X1 P0 P0-X1
red P1 X2 P1 P1-X2
yellow P2 X3 P2 P2-X3
green P3 X4 P3 P3-X4

7.6.2.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Installing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 169, see also figure 70 on
page 167
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73

210 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

7.6.3 Removing the rear extension box

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 15 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: Phillips PZ2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

7.6.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê Remove all HDD / SSD modules from the server as described in section
"Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 172.
V CAUTION!
Ensure that all hard disk drives are uniquely identified so that you can
reinsert them into their original bays after replacing the HDD
backplane.
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

7.6.3.2 Disconnecting cables from the rear backplane

Ê "Disconnecting cables from the rear backplane" on page 201

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 211

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.6.3.3 Removing the rear HDD cage

Figure 114: Rear HDD cage - 3 screws on the top

Ê Remove the 3 screws on the top (see circles).

Figure 115: Rear HDD cage - 2 screws on the side

Ê Remove the 2 screws on the side (see circles).

212 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 116: Removing the rear HDD cage

Ê Push the rear HDD cage in the direction of the arrow (1).
Ê Take off the rear HDD cage from the chassis (2).

7.6.3.4 Installing the rear air grid (left hand)

Figure 117: Installing the rear air grid

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 213

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Ê Insert the rear air grid.

Ê Fasten the rear air grid with three screws (see circles and closeup).

7.6.3.5 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

214 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

8 Expansion cards and backup
units
Safety notes
V CAUTION!
● Do not damage or modify internal cables or devices. Doing so may
cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock.
● Devices and components inside the server remain hot after
shutdown. After shutting down the server, wait for hot components to
cool down before installing or removing internal options.
● Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and
can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up
(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostatic-
sensitive devices (ESDs).
● Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit
boards by their metallic areas or edges.
● If devices are installed or disassembled using methods other than
those outlined in this chapter, the warranty will be invalidated.
● For further information, please refer to chapter "Important
information" on page 45.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 215

Expansion cards and backup units

8.1 Basic information

The system board is equipped with seven expansion slots:

Slot 9 Riser 2
Slot 8
Slot 7

DynLoM
Slot 3 Riser 1
Slot 2
Slot 1
Figure 118: PCI slot overview on the system board

Slot 11 Slot 5
Slot 9
Slot 8
Slot 7

Slot 3
Slot 2
Slot 1

Slot 10 Slot 4

Figure 119: PCI slot overview on the rear

216 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

PCI
Type CPU Type length Function
slot
half length
1 PCIe Gen 3 1 x8 (mech.x8) only low profile (LP)
(HL)
2 PCIe Gen 3 1 x8 (mech.x8) HL only LP
3** PCIe Gen 3 1 x16 (mech.x16) HL only LP, riser slot
x16 (mech.x16) full length (FL) full heigth (FH), with D3264
4* PCIe Gen 3 1
x8 (mech.x8) FL FH, with D3274
FH, only available with riser
5* PCIe Gen 3 1 x8 (mech.x8) FL
D3274
6 not available
7 PCIe Gen 3 2 x8 (mech.x8) HL only LP
8 PCIe Gen 3 2 x16 (mech.x16) HL only LP
9** PCIe Gen 3 2 x16 (mech.x16) HL only LP, riser slot
x16 (mech.x16) FL full height (FH), with D3264
10* PCIe Gen 3 2
x8 (mech.x8) FL FH, with D3274
FH, only available with riser
11* PCIe Gen 3 2 x8 (mech.x8) FL
D3274

* Slot 4, 5,10 and 11 are only available with a riser card.

** Slot 3 and 9 are PCIe slots and usable for slot expansion with riser cards (two
types).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 217

Expansion cards and backup units

8.1.1 Expansion card overview and installation

sequence

Adapter

Max # Adapter
Installation Adapter

Slot#10 D3274

Slot#10 D3264

Slot#11 D3274

Dynamic LOM
Slot#4 D3274

Slot#4 D3264

Slot#5 D3274
Sequence Product

Connector
Order within Name

Slot#X2
Adapter Description Adapter

Slot#1

Slot#2

Slot#3

Slot#7

Slot#8

Slot#9
Category Adapter (Softwarepo Customer
(Cluster) Vendor ol) Order No.

1 Fujitsu PLAN EM 2 x S26361- 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - 1

Technology 1GB T F5302-E201
Solutions
2 Fujitsu PLAN EM 4 x S26361- 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - 1
Technology 1GB T F5302-E401
Solutions
3 Fujitsu PLAN EM 2 x S26361- 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - 1
Technology 10GB T F5302-E210
Solutions
4 Fujitsu PLAN EM 2 x S26361- 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - 1
Technology 10GB SFP F5302-E211
Solutions

1 Fujitsu Riser 8/8 S26361- 2 - - 1 - - - - - 2 - - - -

Technology FF3846-E***
Solutions
2 Fujitsu Riser 16 S26361- 2 - - 1 - - - - - 2 - - - -
Technology FF3846-E***
Solutions

1 Nvidia PY VGA S26361- 1 - 1 - - - - - - - - - - -

Card 512MB F2748-
PCI-e x1 E/L537 (FH)
(NVIDIA NVS S26361-
300) F2748-
E/L637 (LP)

1 Fujitsu PPCI EP x16 S26361- 2 - - 1 - 4 - - 2 3 - 5 - -

Technology Switch F5267-E1 /
Solutions E201 / L501

1 Nvidia PGRA CP S26361- 2 - - - - 1 - - - - - 2 - -

NVIDIA Grid F2222-E914
K1 or S26361-
F2222-L914
2 Nvidia PGRA CP S26361- 2 - - - - 1 - - - - - 2 - -
NVIDIA Grid F2222-E924
K2 or S26361-
F2222-L924

1 Fujitsu PRAID S26361- 2 1 4 2 5 - - 3 - - - - - -

Technology EP400i F5243-E1 /
Solutions L1
2 Fujitsu PRAID S26361- 2 1 4 2 5 - - 3 - - - - - -
Technology EP420i F5243-E2 /
Solutions L2
3 Fujitsu PRAID S26361- 1 1 4 2 5 - - 3 - - - - - -
Technology CP400i F3842-E1 / -
Solutions L501

218 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Adapter

Max # Adapter
Installation Adapter

Slot#10 D3274

Slot#10 D3264

Slot#11 D3274

Dynamic LOM
Slot#4 D3274

Slot#4 D3264

Slot#5 D3274
Sequence Product

Connector
Order within Name

Slot#X2
Adapter Description Adapter

Slot#1

Slot#2

Slot#3

Slot#7

Slot#8

Slot#9
Category Adapter (Softwarepo Customer
(Cluster) Vendor ol) Order No.

1 Mellanox IB HCA S26361- 2 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -

Technology 40Gb 1 port F4475-
QDR E103/L103
enhanced
2 Mellanox IB HCA S26361- 2 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -
Technology 40Gb 2 port F4475-
QDR E203/L203
enhanced
3 Mellanox IB HCA S26361- 2 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -
Technology 56Gb 1 port F4533-
FDR E102/L102
4 Mellanox IB HCA S26361- 2 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -
Technology 56Gb 2 port F4533-
FDR E202/L202
5 Intel PIB EP S26361- 2 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -
QLE7340e F4475-
E122/L122
6 Intel PIB EP S26361- 2 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -
QLE7342e F4475-
E222/L222

1 Fujitsu PSAS S26361- 1 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -

Technology CP400i F3842-E2 / -
Solutions L502
2 LSI Logic PSAS S26361- 2 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -
CP400e F3842-E2 / -
L502

1 EMULEX PFC EP S26361- 6 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -

LPe16000 F4994-E1/
S26361-
F4994-E201/
S26361-
F4994-L501

2 EMULEX PFC EP S26361- 6 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -

LPe16002 F4994-E2/
S26361-
F4994-E202/
S26361-
F4994-L502

3 EMULEX FC CTRL S26361- 6 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -

LPe12002 F3961-E2 /
S26361-
F3961-E202
/
S26361-
F3961-L2 /
S26361-
F3961-L202
4 EMULEX FC CTRL S26361- 6 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -
LPe1250 F3961-E1 /
S26361-
F3961-E201
/
S26361-
F3961-L1 /
S26361-
F3961-L201

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 219

Expansion cards and backup units

Adapter

Max # Adapter
Installation Adapter

Slot#10 D3274

Slot#10 D3264

Slot#11 D3274

Dynamic LOM
Slot#4 D3274

Slot#4 D3264

Slot#5 D3274
Sequence Product

Connector
Order within Name

Slot#X2
Adapter Description Adapter

Slot#1

Slot#2

Slot#3

Slot#7

Slot#8

Slot#9
Category Adapter (Softwarepo Customer
(Cluster) Vendor ol) Order No.

5 Qlogic FC CTRL S26361- 6 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -

QLE2560 F3631-E1 /
S26361-
F3631-L1 /
S26361-
F3631-E201
/
S26361-
F3631-L201
6 Qlogic FC CTRL S26361- 6 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -
QLE2562 F3631-E2 /
S26361-
F3631-L2 /
S26361-
F3631-E202
/
S26361-
F3631-L202
7 Qlogic PFC EP S26361- 6 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -
QLE2670 F5313-E1 /
S26361-
F5313-E201
8 Qlogic PFC EP S26361- 6 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -
QLE2672 F5313-E2 /
S26361-
F5313-E202

1 EMULEX OCe14102 S26361- 4 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -

F5250- E1/
S26361-
F5250-E201/
S26361-
F5250-L501

1 Fujitsu Eth Ctrl S26361- 3 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -

Technology 2x10Gbit F3629-E2 /
Solutions PCIe x8 E202 / L502 /
D2755 SFP+ E702

2 Intel Eth Ctrl S26361- 3 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -

2x10GBase- F3752-E2 /
T PCIe x8 E202 / L502
X540-T2
3 Intel PLAN CP S26361- 4 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -
4x1Gbit Cu F4610-E4 /
Intel I350-T4 E204 / L504 /
E704
4 Intel PLAN CP S26361- 4 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -
2x1Gbit Cu F4610-E2 /
Intel I350-T2 E202 / L502 /
E702
5 Intel Eth Ctrl S26361- 4 12 1 2 6 10 7 3 4 5 8 11 9 -
1x1Gbit PCI- F3516-E1 /
e Gigabit CT L1 / E201 /
DT Cu L201

220 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

I The list may be changed due to new controllers.

For the latest information on supported expansion cards, refer your
server’s hardware configurator available online at the following address:
for the EMEA market:
http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/index.htm
for the Japanese market:
http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/system/

8.1.2 Using riser modules

There are two types of riser modules available:

– A short riser card holder with a PCIe riser card with 2x PCIe Gen3 x8 slots
– A long riser card holder with a PCIe riser card with 1x PCIe Gen3 x16 slot

8.1.2.1 Population rules

– Only riser modules of the same type can be used.

– Up to two riser modules can be installed.
– If only one riser module is installed it must be installed on the right side.

Riser module 2 Riser module 1

Figure 120: Installation locations of the riser modules

For details see section "Expansion cards in riser modules (HL)" on page 243
and section "GPGPU cards in riser modules (FL)" on page 269.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 221

Expansion cards and backup units

8.2 Handling slot brackets

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5mm

8.2.1 Installing a slot bracket

8.2.1.1 Installing a standard slot bracket

Figure 121: Installing a standard slot bracket (A)

Ê Place the controller on the mounting tabs of the slot bracket.

222 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 122: Installing a standard slot bracket (B)

Ê Secure the slot bracket to the controller with two M3 x 4.5 mm screws.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 223

Expansion cards and backup units

8.2.1.2 Installing a slot bracket to the Network adapter D2755

Figure 123: Network adapter D2755 - Mounting the slot bracket (A)

Ê Place the controller on the mounting tabs on the slot bracket (1).
Ê Carefully shift the slot bracket towards the controller until the plug shells
engage with the cut-outs in the slot bracket connector panel (2).
Ê Ensure that the ESD springs on the plug shells properly engage with the slot
bracket as shown (see close-ups).

224 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 124: Network adapter D2755 - Mounting the slot bracket (B)

Ê Secure the slot bracket to the controller with two M3 x 4.5 mm screws.

Figure 125: Network adapter D2755 - Mounting the slot bracket (C)

I Assembled network adapter D2755

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 225

Expansion cards and backup units

8.2.1.3 Installing a slot bracket to the USB 3.0 interface card D3305

V CAUTION!
The USB 3.0 interface card D3305 comes pre-assembled with a full
height slot bracket. When replacing the slot bracket, ensure to use the
original M3 x 5 mm screws. Standard M3 screws may damage onboard
components.

Figure 126: Mounting the slot bracket (A)

Ê Place the controller on the mounting tabs on the slot bracket.

Ê Carefully shift the slot bracket towards the controller until the plug shells
engage with the cut-outs in the slot bracket connector panel.

226 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 127: Mounting the PCI slot bracket (B)

Ê Secure the slot bracket to the controller with the two M3 x 5 mm screws
contained in the expansion card kit.

8.2.2 Removing a slot bracket

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

Removing the slot bracket

Ê Remove the two screws.
Ê Remove the controller from the mounting tabs on the slot bracket.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 227

Expansion cards and backup units

8.3 Handling SFP+ transceiver modules

For Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) configurations, the ethernet server
adapter is equipped with one or two SFP+ (small form-factor pluggable)
transceiver modules.

8.3.1 Installing SFP+ transceiver modules

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: tool-less

Preparing the SFP+ transceiver module

Figure 128: Removing the protective optical port plug

Ê Remove the SFP+ transceiver module from its protective packaging.

Ê Remove the optical port plug from the new / additional SFP+ transceiver
module.
V CAUTION!
– Always keep the protective port plugs attached to the transceiver
optical bores and fiber-optic cable connectors until you are ready
to make a connection.
– Save the protective port plug for future use.

228 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 129: Unlatching the locking bail

Ê Carefully unlatch and fold down the locking bail on the SFP+ transceiver
module.

Inserting the SFP+ transceiver module

Figure 130: Inserting the SFP+ transceiver module

Ê Insert and slide the SFP+ transceiver module into the socket connector as
far as it will go.
I If only one slot is equipped with a SFP+ transceiver module, use the
left connector as shown.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 229

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 131: Latching the locking bail

Ê Carefully fold up and latch the locking bail.

Figure 132: Installing the protective optical port plug

Ê If the SFP+ transceiver module is not immediately connected to an LC

connector, attach the protective optical port plug to the transceiver optical
bores.

230 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Installing the secondary SFP+ transceiver module

Figure 133: Installing the secondary SFP+ transceiver module

Ê If applicable, install the secondary SFP+ transceiver module accordingly.

8.3.2 Removing an SFP+ transceiver module

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: tool-less

For Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) configurations, the ethernet server
adapter is equipped with one or two SFP+ (small form-factor pluggable)
transceiver modules.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 231

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 134: Removing the protective optical port plug

Ê If present, remove the protective optical port plug from the SFP+ transceiver
module.
V CAUTION!
Save the protective port plug for future use.

Figure 135: Unlatching the locking bail

Ê Carefully unlatch and fold down the locking bail on the SFP+ transceiver
module to eject the transceiver from the socket connector.

232 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 136: Removing the SFP+ transceiver module

Ê Pull the SFP+ transceiver module out of its socket connector.

Ê Attach the protective optical port plug to the transceiver optical bores.
I Place the removed SFP+ transceiver module in an antistatic bag or
other protective environment.

8.3.3 Replacing SFP+ transceiver modules

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tool: tool-less

For Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) configurations, the ethernet server
adapter is equipped with one or two SFP+ (small form-factor pluggable)
transceiver modules.

Removing SFP+ transceiver modules

Ê Remove the defective SFP+ transceiver module(s) as described in section
"Removing an SFP+ transceiver module" on page 231.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 233

Expansion cards and backup units

Installing SFP+ transceiver modules

Ê Unpack the new SFP+ transceiver module.
Ê Verify that the new SFP+ transceiver module is the same type of transceiver
you are replacing.
Ê Install the new SFP+ transceiver module(s) as described in section
"Installing a slot bracket" on page 222.
Ê Inform the customer about changed WWN and MAC addresses. For further
information, refer to section "Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses"
on page 100.

8.4 Standard expansion cards

8.4.1 Installing expansion cards

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

8.4.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

234 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.4.1.2 Removing the slot cover

Figure 137: Removing the slot cover

Ê Remove the screw (see circle).

Ê Remove the slot cover.
V CAUTION!
Keep the slot cover for further use.
Always replace slot covers into unused PCI slot openings to comply
with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

8.4.1.3 Installing an expansion card

Ê Remove the expansion card from its protective packaging.

I For further instructions regarding controller settings, please refer to
the accompanying documentation.
Ê If applicable, attach the required slot bracket to the expansion card as
described in section "Installing a slot bracket" on page 222.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 235

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 138: Installing the expansion card

Ê Carefully insert the expansion card into the desired PCI slot and press down
firmly until it is fully seated in the slot.
Ê Fasten the expansion card with the screw (see circle).
Ê If applicable, install SFP+ transceiver modules into the new expansion card,
as described in section "Installing SFP+ transceiver modules" on page 228.
Ê If applicable, connect internal cables to the expansion card.
I For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section "List of used
cables" on page 547.
Ê If applicable, connect a FBU to the expansion card as described in section
"Installing a FBU" on page 298.

8.4.1.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê If applicable, connect all external cables to the expansion card(s).
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73

236 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Ê If applicable, "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 88.

Ê If applicable, "Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 89.
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

8.4.2 Removing expansion cards

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

8.4.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê Remove all external cables from the expansion card to be removed.
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

8.4.2.2 Removing an expansion card

Ê If applicable, disconnect internal cables from the expansion card.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 237

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 139: Removing an expansion card

Ê If applicable, "Removing an SFP+ transceiver module" on page 231.

Ê Remove the screw (see circle).
Ê Carefully remove the expansion card from its slot.

238 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.4.2.3 Installing a PCI slot cover

V CAUTION!
Always replace slot covers into unused PCI slot openings to comply with
applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

Figure 140: Installing a slot cover

Ê Insert a slot cover into the unused PCI slot opening.

Ê Fasten slot cover with the screw (see circle).

8.4.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 239

Expansion cards and backup units

8.4.3 Replacing expansion cards

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

Note on network settings recovery

I When replacing network controllers or the system board, network
configuration settings in the operating system will be lost and replaced
by default values. This applies to all static IP address and LAN teaming
configurations.
Ensure to note down your current network settings before replacing a
controller or the system board.

8.4.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê If applicable, "Note on network settings recovery" on page 240.

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê Remove all external cables from the expansion card to be replaced.
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê Locate the defective expansion card using the onboard Local Diagnostic
LEDs as described in section "Onboard indicators and controls" on
page 572.

240 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.4.3.2 Removing an expansion card

Ê If applicable, "Removing an SFP+ transceiver module" on page 231.

Ê "Removing expansion cards" on page 237
Ê If the slot bracket on the defective expansion card is to be reused, remove it
from the board as described in section "Removing a slot bracket" on
page 227.

8.4.3.3 Installing an expansion card

Ê If applicable, "Installing a slot bracket" on page 222.

Ê "Installing expansion cards" on page 234.
Ê If applicable, "Installing SFP+ transceiver modules" on page 228.

8.4.3.4 Connecting cables to the expansion card

Ê If applicable, connect internal cables to the expansion card.

I For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section "List of used
cables" on page 547.

8.4.3.5 Connecting a battery backup unit to the expansion card

Ê If applicable, connect a FBU to the expansion card as described in section

"Installing a FBU" on page 298.

8.4.3.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê Connect all external cables to the replaced expansion card.
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS" on page 93
Ê If applicable, inform the customer about changed WWN and MAC
addresses. For further information, refer to section "Looking up changed
MAC / WWN addresses" on page 100.
Ê If applicable,"Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 88.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 241

Expansion cards and backup units

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

242 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.5 Expansion cards in riser modules (HL)

8.5.1 Basic information

I HL means cards with half length (about 130 mm).

I Note for installations with expansion cards in slot 5 and slot 11!

Figure 141: Removing a connector from an expansion card in a riser in slot 5 or 11

Ê Insert a small tool (e.g. a small slotted screw driver) in the gap
between the connector and the housing (1).
Ê Press down the locking mechanism (2).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 243

Expansion cards and backup units

8.5.2 Installing an expansion card in riser module 1 (HL)

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

8.5.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

244 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.5.2.2 Installing a riser card with 2 PCIe slots Gen3 x8 (HL)

Figure 142: Installing a riser card

Ê Insert the riser card with 2 PCIe slots Gen3 x8 in the holder.
Ê Fasten the riser card with four screws (see circles).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 245

Expansion cards and backup units

8.5.2.3 Installing a PCIe expansion card in a riser module (HL)

Figure 143: Installing a PCIe expansion card in a riser module

Ê Carefully insert the PCIe expansion card into the desired PCI slot and press
down firmly until it is fully seated in the slot.
Ê Fasten the expansion card with the screw (see circle).
V CAUTION!
Always replace slot covers into unused PCI slot openings to comply with
applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

246 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.5.2.4 Removing the slot cover (riser module 1)

Figure 144: Removing the slot cover

Ê Remove the screw (see circle).

Ê Remove the slot cover.
V CAUTION!
Keep the slot cover for further use.
Always replace slot covers into unused PCI slot openings to comply
with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 247

Expansion cards and backup units

8.5.2.5 Removing the rear air grid (riser module 1)

Figure 145: Removing the rear air grid

Ê Remove three screws (see circles).

Ê Remove the rear air grid.
V CAUTION!
Keep the rear air grid for further use.
Always replace rear air grids into unused installation locations to
comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling
requirements.

248 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.5.2.6 Installing the riser module 1 (HL)

Figure 146: Positions of the recesses

Ê Take note of the two recesses in the stabilizer bar (see circles).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 249

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 147: Installing the riser module 1 (A)

Ê Insert the riser module.

I Make sure that the riser module engages properly in the recesses
(see figure before).
Make sure that the bracket of the riser card holder is positioned
outside the chassis (see closeup).
Ê Carefully push down the riser module until the contacts of the riser card are
fully seated in the PCIe socket.

250 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 148: Installing the riser module 1 (B)

Ê Fasten the riser module with five screws (see circles).

Ê If applicable, install SFP+ transceiver modules into the new expansion card,
as described in section "Installing SFP+ transceiver modules" on page 228.
Ê If applicable, connect internal cables to the expansion card.
I For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section "List of used
cables" on page 547.
Ê If applicable, connect a FBU to the expansion card as described in section
"Installing a FBU" on page 298.

8.5.2.7 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê Connect all external cables to the expansion card(s).
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê If applicable, "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 88.
Ê If applicable, "Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 89.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 251

Expansion cards and backup units

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

8.5.3 Removing riser module 1 (HL)

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PZ2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

8.5.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê If applicable, "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê Remove all external cables from the expansion card to be removed.
I If there is a cable installed to an expansion card in the upper slot, see
section "Basic information" on page 243.
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê If applicable, disconnect internal cables from the expansion cards.

8.5.3.2 Removing the riser module 1 (HL)

Ê If applicable, "Removing an SFP+ transceiver module" on page 231.

252 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 149: Removing the riser module 1

Ê Remove five screws (see circles).

Ê Carefully take out the riser module.

8.5.3.3 Removing an expansion card (HL)

Figure 150: Removing an expansion card from a riser module

Ê Remove the screw (see circle).

Ê Carefully remove the expansion card from its slot.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 253

Expansion cards and backup units

8.5.3.4 Installing the rear air grid (riser module 1)

Figure 151: Installing the rear air grid

Ê Insert the rear air grid.

Ê Fasten the rear air grid with three screws (see circles).

8.5.3.5 Installing the slot cover (riser module 1)

Figure 152: Installing the slot cover

Ê Insert the slot cover.

Ê Fasten the slot cover with the screw (see circle).

8.5.3.6 Insert the riser module 1 (HL)

Optionally you can install the riser module. In this case proceed as follows:

254 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Ê Install the riser module as described in section "Installing the riser module 1
(HL)" on page 249.

8.5.3.7 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

8.5.4 Installing an expansion card in riser module 2

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PZ2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

8.5.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

8.5.4.2 Installing a riser card

Ê Install the riser card as described in section "Installing a riser card with 2
PCIe slots Gen3 x8 (HL)" on page 245.

8.5.4.3 Installing an expansion card in a riser module

Ê Install the expansion card as described in section "Installing a PCIe

expansion card in a riser module (HL)" on page 246.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 255

Expansion cards and backup units

8.5.4.4 Installing the air grid extension to riser module 2 (HL)

Figure 153: Installing the air grid extension to riser module 2

Ê Position the air grid extension.

I Make sure that the bracket of the riser card holder is positioned
outside the air grid extension (see closeup).
Ê Fasten the air grid extension with two screws (see circles).

8.5.4.5 Removing the rear air grid (riser module 2)

Figure 154: Removing the rear air grid

Ê Remove three screw (see circles).

256 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Ê Remove the rear air grid.

V CAUTION!
Keep the rear air grid for further use.
Always replace rear air grids into unused installation locations to
comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling
requirements.

8.5.4.6 Removing the slot cover (riser module 2)

Figure 155: Removing the slot cover

Ê Remove the screw (see circle).

Ê Remove the slot cover.
V CAUTION!
Keep the slot cover for further use.
Always replace slot covers into unused PCI slot openings to comply
with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 257

Expansion cards and backup units

8.5.4.7 Installing the riser module 2 (HL)

Figure 156: Positions of the recesses

Ê Take note of the two recesses in the stabilizer bar (see circles).

Figure 157: Installing the riser module 2 (A)

Ê Insert the riser module.

I Make sure that the riser module engages properly in the recesses
(see picture before).

258 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Ê Carefully push down the riser module until the contacts of the riser card are
fully seated in the PCIe socket.

Figure 158: Installing the riser module 2 (B)

Ê Fasten the riser module with five screws (see circles).

Ê If applicable, install SFP+ transceiver modules into the new expansion card,
as described in section "Installing SFP+ transceiver modules" on page 228.
Ê If applicable, connect internal cables to the expansion card.
I For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section "List of used
cables" on page 547.
Ê If applicable, connect a FBU to the expansion card as described in section
"Installing a FBU" on page 298.

8.5.4.8 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê Connect all external cables to the expansion card(s).
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê If applicable, "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 88.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 259

Expansion cards and backup units

Ê If applicable, "Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 89.

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

8.5.5 Removing riser module 2 (HL)

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PZ2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

8.5.5.1 Preliminary steps

Ê If applicable, "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê Remove all external cables from the expansion card to be removed.
I If there is a cable installed to an expansion card in the upper slot, see
section "Basic information" on page 243.
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê If applicable, disconnect internal cables from the expansion cards.

8.5.5.2 Removing the riser module 2 (HL)

Ê If applicable, "Removing an SFP+ transceiver module" on page 231.

260 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 159: Removing the riser module 2 (B)

Ê Remove five screws (see circles and closeup).

Ê Carefully take out the riser module.

8.5.5.3 Removing the air grid extension from riser module 2 (HL)

Figure 160: Removing the air grid extension to riser module 2

Ê Remove the two screws (see circles).

Ê Remove the air grid extension in the direction of the arrow.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 261

Expansion cards and backup units

8.5.5.4 Removing an expansion card (HL)

Ê Remove the expansion card as described in section "Removing an

expansion card (HL)" on page 253.

8.5.5.5 Installing the slot cover (riser module 2)

Figure 161: Installing the slot cover

Ê Insert the slot cover.

Ê Fasten the slot cover with the screw.
V CAUTION!
Keep the slot cover for further use.
Always replace slot covers into unused PCI slot openings to comply
with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

262 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.5.5.6 Installing the rear air grid (riser module 2)

Figure 162: Installing the rear air grid

Ê Insert the rear air grid.

Ê Fasten the rear air grid with three screws (see circles and closeup).

8.5.5.7 Insert the riser module 2 (HL)

Optionally you can install the riser module. In this case proceed as follows:
Ê Install the riser module as described in section "Installing the riser module 2
(HL)" on page 258.

8.5.5.8 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 263

Expansion cards and backup units

8.5.6 Replacing expansion cards in riser modules

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PZ2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

Note on network settings recovery

I When replacing network controllers or the system board, network
configuration settings in the operating system will be lost and replaced
by default values. This applies to all static IP address and LAN teaming
configurations.
Ensure to note down your current network settings before replacing a
controller or the system board.

8.5.6.1 Preliminary steps

Ê If applicable, "Note on network settings recovery" on page 240.

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê Remove all external cables from the expansion card to be replaced.
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê If applicable, disconnect internal cables from the expansion card.
Ê Locate the defective expansion card using the onboard Local Diagnostic
LEDs as described in section "Onboard indicators and controls" on
page 572.

8.5.6.2 Removing the defective expansion card

Ê If applicable, remove the riser module 1 as described in section "Removing

the riser module 1 (HL)" on page 252.

264 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Ê If applicable, remove the riser module 2 as described in section "Removing

the riser module 2 (HL)" on page 260.
Ê Remove the expansion card as described in section "Removing an
expansion card (HL)" on page 253.

8.5.6.3 Installing the new expansion card

Ê Install the new expansion card as described in section "Installing a PCIe

expansion card in a riser module (HL)" on page 246.
Ê If applicable, install the riser module 1 as described in section "Installing the
riser module 1 (HL)" on page 249.
Ê If applicable, install the riser module 2 as described in section "Installing the
riser module 2 (HL)" on page 258.

8.5.6.4 Connecting cables to the expansion card

Ê If applicable, connect internal cables to the expansion card.

I For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section "List of used
cables" on page 547.

8.5.6.5 Connecting a battery backup unit to the expansion card

Ê If applicable, connect a FBU to the expansion card as described in section

"Installing a FBU" on page 298.

8.5.6.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê Connect all external cables to the replaced expansion card.
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS" on page 93
Ê If applicable, inform the customer about changed WWN and MAC
addresses. For further information, refer to section "Looking up changed
MAC / WWN addresses" on page 100.
Ê If applicable,"Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 88.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 265

Expansion cards and backup units

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

8.5.7 Replacing a riser card

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PZ2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

8.5.7.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê Remove all external cables from the expansion card to be replaced.
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê If applicable, disconnect internal cables to the expansion card.
Ê Locate the defective riser card using the onboard Local Diagnostic LEDs as
described in section "Onboard indicators and controls" on page 572.

8.5.7.2 Removing the defective riser card

Ê If applicable, remove the riser module 1 as described in section "Removing

the riser module 1 (HL)" on page 252.
Ê If applicable, remove the riser module 2 as described in section "Removing
the riser module 2 (HL)" on page 260.
Ê Remove the expansion card as described in section "Removing an
expansion card (HL)" on page 253.

266 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 163: Removing a riser card

Ê Remove four screws (see circles).

Ê Take the riser card out of the riser card holder.

8.5.7.3 Installing the new riser card

Ê Install the new riser card as described in section "Installing a riser card with
2 PCIe slots Gen3 x8 (HL)" on page 245.
Ê Install the expansion card as described in section "Installing a PCIe
expansion card in a riser module (HL)" on page 246.
Ê If applicable, install the riser module 1 as described in section "Installing the
riser module 1 (HL)" on page 249.
Ê If applicable, install the riser module 2 as described in section "Installing the
riser module 2 (HL)" on page 258.

8.5.7.4 Connecting cables to the expansion card

Ê If applicable, connect internal cables to the expansion card.

I For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section "List of used
cables" on page 547.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 267

Expansion cards and backup units

8.5.7.5 Connecting a battery backup unit to the expansion card

Ê If applicable, connect a FBU to the expansion card as described in section

"Installing a FBU" on page 298.

8.5.7.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê Connect all external cables to the replaced expansion cards.
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS" on page 93
Ê If applicable,"Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 88.
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

268 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.6 GPGPU cards in riser modules (FL)

I FL means cards with full length (311 mm).

8.6.1 Installing a GPGPU card in riser module 1 (FL)

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: side cutter

Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

8.6.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 269

Expansion cards and backup units

8.6.1.2 Removing the slot cover from the riser card holder

Figure 164: Removing the slot cover from the riser card holder

Ê Remove the screw (see circle).

Ê Remove the slot cover.
V CAUTION!
Take care that the EMC spring remains in its place.
V CAUTION!
Keep the slot cover for further use.
Always replace slot covers into unused PCI slot openings to comply
with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

270 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.6.1.3 Installing a riser card with one PCIe slot Gen3 x16 (FL)

Figure 165: Installing a riser card

Ê Insert the riser card with one PCIe slot Gen3 x16 in the holder.
Ê Fasten the riser card with four screws (see circles).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 271

Expansion cards and backup units

8.6.1.4 Installing a GPGPU card in a riser module (FL)

Figure 166: Installing a GPGPU card in a riser module

Ê Carefully insert the GPGPU card into the PCI slot and press down firmly until
it is fully seated in the slot.
Ê Fasten the GPGPU card with two screws (see circles).

8.6.1.5 Replacing the heat sink (FL)

Ê Replace the standard processor heat sink with the processor heat sink for
GPGPU card as described in section "Replacing processor heat sinks" on
page 374.

8.6.1.6 Removing the slot cover (riser module 1)

Ê Remove the slot cover as described in section "Removing the slot cover
(riser module 1)" on page 247.

272 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.6.1.7 Removing the rear air grid (riser module 1)

Ê Remove the rear air grid as described in section "Removing the rear air grid
(riser module 1)" on page 248.

8.6.1.8 Installing the riser module 1 (FL)

Figure 167: Positions of the recesses

Ê Take note of the two recesses in the stabilizer bar (see circles).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 273

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 168: Installing the riser module 1

Ê Insert the riser module.

I Make sure that the riser module engages properly in the recesses
(see picture before).
Make sure that the bracket of the riser card holder is positioned
outside the chassis (see closeup).
Ê Carefully push down the riser module until the contacts of the riser card are
fully seated in the PCIe socket.
Ê Fasten the riser module with five screws (see circles).

274 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 169: Connecting the power cable

Ê Connect the power cable to the power connector on the GPGPU card and
the connector PWR 12V 4 on the system board as shown.
Ê Route the power cable close to the GPGPU card.

8.6.1.9 Installing the FBU on the riser card holder

Figure 170: Installing the FBU in the holder

Ê At a slight angle, fit the FBU under both retaining brackets of the holder.
I Insert the FBU in the direction as shown.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 275

Expansion cards and backup units

Ê Push in the FBU until it locks in place.

Ê Ensure that the FBU is properly seated in the holder as shown.

Figure 171: Position of the shoulder screw caps

Figure 172: Installing the FBU with the holder

Ê Insert the holder into the chassis so that the three shoulder screw caps on
the chassis floor rest in the wide ends of the keyhole slots on the holder.
Ê Slide the holder in direction of the arrow.
The shoulder screw caps on the chassis floor will lock in the narrow ends of
the keyhole slots on the holder.

276 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Ê Ensure that the locking handle on the holder properly snaps in place (see
circle).

8.6.1.10 Installing the system air duct riser module 1

Figure 173: Preparing the system air duct for riser module 1

Ê Break out the blind cover on the right side from the system air duct using a
side cutter (see circles).

Figure 174: Installing the system air duct

Ê Insert the system air duct (1).

Ê Connect the FBU adapter cable to the RAID controller (2).
I To connect an FBU to the controller you need a TFM, see section
"Installing TFM to the RAID controller (if applicable)" on page 299.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 277

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 175: FBU cable routing

Ê Route the cable as shown.

8.6.1.11 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê If applicable, connect all external cables to the expansion card(s).
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê If applicable, "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 88.
Ê If applicable, "Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 89.
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

278 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.6.2 Removing riser module 1 (FL)

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: side cutter

Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

8.6.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê If applicable, "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê If applicable, remove all external cables from the expansion card to be
removed.
I If there is a cable installed to an expansion card in the upper slot, see
section "Basic information" on page 243.
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê If applicable, disconnect internal cables from the GPGPU card.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 279

Expansion cards and backup units

8.6.2.2 Removing the FBU with the holder

Figure 176: Removing the FBU with the holder

Ê Carefully disconnect the FBU cable from FBU adapter cable.

Ê Lift up the green locking handle on the FBU holder while sliding the FBU
holder in the direction of the arrow as far as it will go.
I After that, the hooks on the air duct will rest in the wide ends of the
keyhole slots on the holder.
Ê Lift the FBU holder from the riser card holder.

280 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.6.2.3 Removing the riser module 1 (FL)

Figure 177: Removing the riser module 1

Ê Remove five screws (see circles).

Ê Carefully take out the riser module.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 281

Expansion cards and backup units

8.6.2.4 Removing a GPGPU card (FL)

Figure 178: Removing a GPGPU card from a riser module

Ê Remove two screws (see circles).

Ê Carefully remove the GPGPU card from its slot.

8.6.2.5 Installing the rear air grid (riser module 1)

Ê Install the rear air grid as described in section "Installing the rear air grid
(riser module 1)" on page 254.

8.6.2.6 Installing the slot cover (riser module 1)

Ê Install the slot cover as described in section "Installing the slot cover (riser
module 1)" on page 254.

8.6.2.7 Insert the riser module 1 (HL)

Optionally you can install the riser module. In this case proceed as follows:

282 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Ê Install the riser module as described in section "Installing the riser module 1
(FL)" on page 273.

8.6.2.8 Installing the system air duct

I If no GPGPU card is installed you have to order a new air duct to direct
the airflow directly onto the CPU heat sinks and memory slots.
Ê Install the new system air duct as described in section "Installing the air duct"
on page 67.

8.6.2.9 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

8.6.3 Installing a GPGPU card in riser module 2

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

8.6.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 283

Expansion cards and backup units

8.6.3.2 Removing the slot cover from the riser card holder

Ê Remove the slot cover from the riser card holder as described in section
"Removing the slot cover from the riser card holder" on page 270.

8.6.3.3 Installing a riser card

Ê Install the riser card as described in section "Installing a riser card with one
PCIe slot Gen3 x16 (FL)" on page 271.

8.6.3.4 Installing a GPGPU card in a riser module

Ê Install the GPGPU card in the riser module as described in section "Installing
a GPGPU card in a riser module (FL)" on page 272.

8.6.3.5 Installing the air grid extension to riser module 2 (FL)

Figure 179: Installing the air grid extension to riser module 2

Ê Insert the air grid extension.

I Make sure that the bracket of the riser card holder is positioned
outside the filler (see closeup).
Ê Fasten the air grid extension with two screws (see circles).

284 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.6.3.6 Replacing the heat sink (FL)

Ê Replace the standard processor heat sink with the processor heat sink for
GPGPU card (see figure 251 on page 370) as described in section
"Replacing processor heat sinks" on page 374.

8.6.3.7 Removing the rear air grid (riser module 2)

Ê Remove the rear air grid as described in section "Removing the rear air grid
(riser module 2)" on page 256.

8.6.3.8 Removing the slot cover (riser module 2)

Ê Remove the slot cover as described in section "Removing the slot cover
(riser module 2)" on page 257.

8.6.3.9 Installing the riser module 2 (FL)

Figure 180: Position of the recesses

Ê Take note of the two recesses in the stabilizer bar (see circles).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 285

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 181: Installing the riser module 2

Ê Insert the completely prepared riser module.

I Make sure that the riser module engages properly in the recesses
(see figure before).
Ê Carefully push down the riser module until the contacts of the riser card are
fully seated in the PCIe socket.
Ê Fasten the riser module with five screws (see circles).

Figure 182: Connecting the power cable

Ê Connect the power cable to both connectors on the GPGPU card and the
connector PWR 12V 3 on the system board as shown.

286 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.6.3.10 Installing the FBU (riser module 2)

Ê Install the second FBU as described in section "Installing the FBU on the
riser card holder" on page 275.

Figure 183: Installing the second FBU with the holder

Ê Connect the FBU cable to the FBU adapter cable (1).

Ê Thread the FBU adapter cable through the recess (2).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 287

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 184: Connecting the FBU adapter cable

Ê Route the FBU adapter cable as shown and connect it to the RAID controller.
I Therefore an already installed RAID controller must be removed, see
"Removing an expansion card" on page 237 and "Installing an
expansion card" on page 235.

8.6.3.11 Installing the system air duct riser module 2

Figure 185: Preparing the system air duct for riser module 2

Ê Break out the blind cover on the left side from the system air duct using a
side cutter (see circles).

288 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 186: Installing the system air duct

Ê Insert the system air duct.

8.6.3.12 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê If applicable, connect all external cables to the expansion card(s).
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê If applicable, "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 88.
Ê If applicable, "Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 89.
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 289

Expansion cards and backup units

8.6.4 Removing riser module 2 (FL)

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

8.6.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê If applicable, "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê If applicable, remove all external cables from the expansion card to be
removed.
I If there is a cable installed to an expansion card in the upper slot, see
section "Basic information" on page 243.
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê If applicable, disconnect internal cables from the GPGPU card.

8.6.4.2 Removing the FBU

Ê If applicable, remove the FBU as described in section "Removing the FBU

with the holder" on page 280.

290 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.6.4.3 Removing the riser module 2 (FL)

Figure 187: Removing the riser module 2

Ê Remove five screws (see circles and closeup).

Ê Carefully take out the riser module.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 291

Expansion cards and backup units

8.6.4.4 Removing the air grid extension from riser module 2 (FL)

Figure 188: Removing the air grid extension from riser module 2

Ê Remove the two screws (see circles).

Ê Remove the air grid extension in the direction of the arrow.

8.6.4.5 Removing a GPGPU card (FL)

Ê Remove the GPGPU card as described in section "Removing a GPGPU

card (FL)" on page 282.

8.6.4.6 Installing the slot cover (riser module 2)

Ê Install the slot cover as described in section "Installing the slot cover (riser
module 2)" on page 262.

8.6.4.7 Installing the rear air grid (riser module 2)

Ê Install the rear air grid as described in section "Installing the rear air grid
(riser module 2)" on page 263.

8.6.4.8 Insert the riser module 2 (FL)

Optionally you can install the riser module. In this case proceed as follows:
Ê Install the riser module as described in section "Installing the riser module 2
(FL)" on page 285.

292 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.6.4.9 Installing the system air duct

I If no GPGPU card is installed in riser module 2 you have to order a new

air duct to direct the airflow directly onto the CPU heat sinks and memory
slots.
Ê Install the system air duct as described in section "Installing the system air
duct riser module 1" on page 277.

8.6.4.10 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

8.6.5 Replacing GPGPU cards in riser modules

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

8.6.5.1 Preliminary steps

Ê If applicable, "Note on network settings recovery" on page 240.

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê If applicable, disconnect internal cables from the GPGPU card.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 293

Expansion cards and backup units

Ê Locate the defective GPGPU card using the onboard Local Diagnostic LEDs
as described in section "Onboard indicators and controls" on page 572.

8.6.5.2 Removing the defective GPGPU card

Ê If applicable, remove the riser module 1 as described in section "Removing

the riser module 1 (FL)" on page 281.
Ê If applicable, remove the riser module 2 as described in section "Removing
the riser module 2 (FL)" on page 291.
Ê Remove the GPGPU card as described in section "Removing a GPGPU
card (FL)" on page 282.

8.6.5.3 Installing the new GPGPU card

Ê Install the new GPGPU card as described in section "Installing a GPGPU

card in a riser module (FL)" on page 272.
Ê If applicable, install the riser module 1 as described in section "Installing the
riser module 1 (FL)" on page 273.
Ê If applicable, install the riser module 2 as described in section "Installing the
riser module 2 (FL)" on page 285.

8.6.5.4 Connecting cables to the GPGPU card

Ê If applicable, connect power cables to the GPGPU card.

I For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section "List of used
cables" on page 547.

8.6.5.5 Connecting a battery backup unit to the expansion card

Ê If applicable, connect a FBU to the GPGPU card (riser module 1) as

described in section "Installing the FBU on the riser card holder" on
page 275.
Ê If applicable, connect a FBU to the GPGPU card (riser module 2) as
described in section "Installing the FBU (riser module 2)" on page 287.

8.6.5.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67

294 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Ê Connect all external cables to the replaced GPGPU card.

Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS" on page 93
Ê If applicable,"Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 88.
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

8.6.6 Replacing a riser card

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

8.6.6.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê Remove all external cables from the expansion card to be replaced.
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê If applicable, disconnect internal cables to the expansion card.
Ê Locate the defective riser card using the onboard Local Diagnostic LEDs as
described in section "Onboard indicators and controls" on page 572.

8.6.6.2 Removing the defective GPGPU card

Ê If applicable, remove the riser module 1 as described in section "Removing

the riser module 1 (FL)" on page 281.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 295

Expansion cards and backup units

Ê If applicable, remove the riser module 2 as described in section "Removing

the riser module 2 (FL)" on page 291.
Ê Remove the GPGPU card as described in section "Removing a GPGPU
card (FL)" on page 282.

Figure 189: Removing a riser card

Ê Remove four screws (see circles).

Ê Take the riser card out of the riser card holder.

8.6.6.3 Installing the new GPGPU card

Ê Install the new riser card as described in section "Installing a riser card with
one PCIe slot Gen3 x16 (FL)" on page 271.
Ê Install the new GPGPU card as described in section "Installing a GPGPU
card in a riser module (FL)" on page 272.
Ê If applicable, install the riser module 1 as described in section "Installing the
riser module 1 (FL)" on page 273.
Ê If applicable, install the riser module 2 as described in section "Installing the
riser module 2 (FL)" on page 285.

8.6.6.4 Connecting cables to the expansion cards

Ê If applicable, connect internal cables to the expansion cards.

296 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

I For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section "List of used

cables" on page 547.

8.6.6.5 Connecting a battery backup unit to the expansion card

Ê If applicable, connect a FBU to the GPGPU card (riser module 1) as

described in section "Installing the FBU on the riser card holder" on
page 275.
Ê If applicable, connect a FBU to the GPGPU card (riser module 1) as
described in section "Installing the FBU (riser module 2)" on page 287.

8.6.6.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê Connect all external cables to the replaced expansion card.
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS" on page 93
Ê If applicable,"Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 88.
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 297

Expansion cards and backup units

8.7 Backup Units

8.7.1 Basic information

The Flash Backup Unit (FBU) backs up the memory contents of the connected
SAS RAID controller in the event of a power failure. The PRIMERGY
RX2540 M1 server can accommodate up to two backup units.

FBU 2
FBU1

Figure 190: FBU mounting positions

8.7.2 Installing a FBU

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver

V CAUTION!
For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important
information" on page 45.

298 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.7.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

8.7.2.2 Installing TFM to the RAID controller (if applicable)

I To connect an FBU to the controller you need a TFM.

Figure 191: Preparing the TFM (A)

Ê Insert the screws into the bolts.

I Leave the distance of the thickness of the TPM between screw head
and bolt.
Ê Push the bolt with the screw in the recesses of the TFM.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 299

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 192: Preparing the TFM (B)

Ê Push the bolt with the screw in the recesses of the TFM.

Figure 193: Preparing the TFM (C)

300 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 194: Mounting the TFM kit (A)

Ê Fit the spacer bolts on the TFM on SAS RAID controller.

Figure 195: Mounting the TFM kit (A)

Ê Fasten the TFM on the controller with the two screws.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 301

Expansion cards and backup units

8.7.2.3 Preparing the FBU

Figure 196: Installing the FBU in the FBU holder

Ê At a slight angle, fit the FBU under both retaining brackets of the FBU holder
as shown.
Ê Push in the FBU until it locks in place.
Ê Ensure that the FBU is properly seated in the holder.

8.7.2.4 Connecting the FBU to the RAID controller

Figure 197: Connecting the FBU adapter cable to the FBU

Ê Connect the cable end on the FBU module to the FBU adapter cable as
shown.

302 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 198: Connecting the FBU adapter cable to the FBU

Ê Connect the FBU adapter cable to the connector on TFM as shown.

Ê Install the RAID controller see section "Installing expansion cards" on
page 234.

8.7.2.5 Installing the FBU holder onto the air duct

Figure 199: Installing the FBU (A)

I Note the positions of the fixation bolts on the air duct and keyhole slots
on the FBU holder.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 303

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 200: Installing the FBU (B)

Ê Insert the FBU holder into the air duct so that the three hooks on the air duct
rest in the wide ends of the keyhole slots on the FBU holder (1).
Ê Slide the FBU holder in as far as it will go (2).
The hooks on the air duct will lock in the narrow ends of the keyhole slots on
the FBU holder.
Ê Ensure that the locking handle on the FBU holder properly snaps in place.

8.7.2.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê If applicable, "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 88.
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93

304 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.7.3 Removing a FBU

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: tool-less

V CAUTION!
Do not throw backup units into the trash can. Batteries must be disposed
of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.
For further safety information, please refer to section "Environmental
protection" on page 55.

8.7.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê Carefully disconnect the FBU cable from the RAID controller (see arrow).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 305

Expansion cards and backup units

8.7.3.2 Removing the FBU holder from the air duct

Figure 201: Removing the FBU holder from the air duct

Ê Lift up the green locking handle on the FBU holder (1) while sliding the FBU
holder to the left as far as it will go (2).
I After that, the hooks on the air duct will rest in the wide ends of the
keyhole slots on the holder.
Ê Lift the FBU holder from the air duct (3).
Ê Pull the FBU cable through the gap in the air duct.

306 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 202: Disconnecting the FBU

Ê Press down on the locking latch on the FBU cable and disconnect the FBU
adapter cable.

8.7.3.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê If applicable, "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 88.
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 307

Expansion cards and backup units

8.7.4 Replacing a FBU

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(URU)

Tools: tool-less

V CAUTION!
Do not throw battery backup units into the trash can. Batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special
waste.
For further safety information, please refer to section "Environmental
protection" on page 55.

8.7.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

308 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.7.4.2 Removing a FBU from the air duct

Ê "Removing the FBU holder from the air duct" on page 306

8.7.4.3 Disconnecting the FBU cable from the FBU

Figure 203: Disconnecting the FBU

Ê Press down on the locking latch on the FBU cable and disconnect the FBU
adapter cable.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 309

Expansion cards and backup units

8.7.4.4 Removing the FBU from the holder

Figure 204: Removing the FBU from the holder

Ê Pull the FBU at a slight angle out of the holder.

8.7.4.5 Installing a new FBU

Ê "Connecting the FBU to the RAID controller" on page 302

Ê "Preparing the FBU" on page 302
Ê "Installing the FBU holder onto the air duct" on page 303

8.7.4.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê If applicable, "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 88.
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93

310 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.8 DynamicLoM module

8.8.1 Basic information

DynamicLoM Part number Bolt Part number Fixation

module length DynamicLoM
metal bracket
with screw
M3x3.5
1Gb x2port S26361-D3245- 5 mm C26192-Y1- C26361-B121-
A100 C65 C1
1Gb x4port S26361-D3255- 5 mm C26192-Y1- C26361-B121-
A100 C65 C1
10Gb x2port S26361-D3265- 8 mm C26192-Y1- C26361-B121-
(SFP) A100 C66 C1
10Gb x2port S26361-D3275- 8 mm C26192-Y1- C26361-B121-
A100 C66 C1

I When replacing network controllers, network configuration settings in the

operating system will be lost and replaced by default values. This applies
to all static IP address and LAN teaming configurations.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 311

Expansion cards and backup units

8.8.1.1 PLAN EM 2x 1GB T

Figure 205: DynamicLoM module D3245

P1
P0:xxxx xxxx xxx0
P1:xxxx xxxx xxx1

P0

Figure 206: MAC label for D3245

312 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.8.1.2 PLAN EM 4x 1GB T

Figure 207: DynamicLoM module D3255

P3 P2:xxxx xxxx xxx2(6,A,E)

P3:xxxx xxxx xxx3(7,B,F)
P2

P1 P0:xxxx xxxx xxx0(4,8,C)

P1:xxxx xxxx xxx1(5,9,D)
P0

Figure 208: MAC labels for D3255

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 313

Expansion cards and backup units

8.8.1.3 PLAN EM 2x 10 GB SFP

Figure 209: DynamicLoM module D3265

P1 P0:xxxx xxxx xxx0 - 7

P1:xxxx xxxx xxx8 - F

P0

Figure 210: MAC label D3265

314 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.8.1.4 PLAN EM 2x 10 GB T

Figure 211: DynamicLoM module D3275

P1

P0
P0:xxxx xxxx xxx0 - 7
P1:xxxx xxxx xxx8 - F

Figure 212: MAC label D3275

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 315

Expansion cards and backup units

8.8.2 Installing the DynamicLoM module

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tool: – Phillips PH0 / (+) No. 0 screw driver

– hexagon screw driver 5 mm

8.8.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

8.8.2.2 Removing the slot cover

Figure 213: Removing the slot cover

Ê Press the two handles together.

Ê Remove the slot cover.

316 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 214: Removing the screws

Ê Remove the system board screw (see circle).

8.8.2.3 Installing the DynamicLoM module

Figure 215: Inserting the bolts

Ê Fasten the bolts.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 317

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 216: Inserting the DynamicLoM module

Ê Install the DynamicLoM module with the bottom side above.

I For DynamicLoM D3275:
Remove the protective foil.
Ê Fasten it with the three screws on the bolts (M3x 4.5 mm).

8.8.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê Inform the customer about changed WWN and MAC addresses. For further
information, refer to section "Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses"
on page 100.
Ê "Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment" on page 97
Ê "Configuring LAN teaming" on page 104
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê Start Emulex PXESelect Utility

318 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

Ê Press the [Ctrl] + [P] keys during POST phase.

Ê Select Controller #1 Configuration and press the [Enter] key.
Controller Model: OCI14000-LOM
Firmware Version: 10.2.265.3
IPL Version: LS2FFTE0
Multichannel: DISABLED
Personality: NIC
SRIOV: DISABLED
RoCE Profile : RoCE-1
Ê Press the[F6] key to continue.
Port Selection Menue
Ê Select Controller #1 - Port #1: Bus xx Dev 00 and press the [Enter] key.
1. NIC Configuration
2. Boot Configuration
3. Port Configuration
Ê Select Boot Configuration and press the [Enter] key.
PXE Boot: ENABLED
Ê Press the [ESC] key twice to get back to the Port Selection Menu.
Ê Select Controller #1 - Port #2: Bus xx Dev 04 and press the [Enter] key.
1. NIC Configuration
2. Boot Configuration
3. Port Configuration
Ê Select Boot Configuration and press the [Enter] key.
PXE Boot: ENABLED
Ê Press the [ESC] key twice to get back to the Port Selection Menu.
Ê Press the [F7] key to save the settings.
Ê Press the [Y] key to exit the Utility menue.
Ê Start BIOS Configuration Utility

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 319

Expansion cards and backup units

– Press the [F2] key during POST phase.

– Select Advanced Menu.
– Select Onboard Devices Configuration.
Onboard CNA Enabled
Onboard CNA Oprom Enabled
– In the Save & Exit menu select the required parameter and press the
[Enter] key.

320 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.8.3 Removing the DynamicLoM module

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tool: – Phillips PH0 / (+) No. 0 screw driver

– hexagon screw driver 5 mm

8.8.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

8.8.3.2 Removing the DynamicLoM module

Figure 217: Removing the DynamicLoM module

Ê Remove the screws.

Ê Remove the DynamicLoM module.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 321

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 218: Removing the bolts

Ê Remove the bolts.

Figure 219: Inserting the screws

Ê Insert in place of the bolts the system board screw (see circle).

322 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.8.3.3 Installing the slot cover

Figure 220: Installing the slot cover

Ê Insert the slot cover. Remark the marking!

8.8.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93

8.8.4 Replacing the DynamicLoM module

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(URU)

Tool: – Phillips PH0 / (+) No. 0 screw driver

– hexagon screw driver 5 mm

8.8.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 323

Expansion cards and backup units

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59

Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

8.8.4.2 Removing the DynamicLoM module

Ê "Removing the DynamicLoM module" on page 321

8.8.4.3 Installing the DynamicLoM module

Ê "Installing the DynamicLoM module" on page 317

8.8.4.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê Inform the customer about changed WWN and MAC addresses. For further
information, refer to section "Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses"
on page 100.
Ê "Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment" on page 97
Ê "Configuring LAN teaming" on page 104
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê Start Emulex PXESelect Utility.
Ê Press the [Ctrl] + [P] keys during POST phase.
Ê Select Controller #1 Configuration and press the [Enter] key.
Controller Model: OCI14000-LOM
Firmware Version: 10.2.265.3
IPL Version: LS2FFTE0
Multichannel: DISABLED
Personality: NIC
SRIOV: DISABLED

324 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

RoCE Profile : RoCE-1

Ê Press the[F6] key to continue.
Port Selection Menue
Ê Select Controller #1 - Port #1: Bus xx Dev 00 and press the [Enter] key.
1. NIC Configuration
2. Boot Configuration
3. Port Configuration
Ê Select Boot Configuration and press the [Enter] key.
PXE Boot: ENABLED
Ê Press the [ESC] key twice to get back to the Port Selection Menu.
Ê Select Controller #1 - Port #2: Bus xx Dev 04 and press the [Enter] key.
1. NIC Configuration
2. Boot Configuration
3. Port Configuration
Ê Select Boot Configuration and press the [Enter] key.
PXE Boot: ENABLED
Ê Press the [ESC] key twice to get back to the Port Selection Menu.
Ê Press the [F7] key to save the settings.
Ê Press the [Y] key to exit the Utility menu.
Ê Start BIOS Configuration Utility.
– Press the [F2] key during POST phase.
– Select Advanced Menu.
– Select Onboard Devices Configuration.
Onboard CNA Enabled
Onboard CNA Oprom Enabled
– In the Save & Exit menu select the required parameter and press the
[Enter] key.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 325

Expansion cards and backup units

Ê Reconfigure your network settings in the operation system according to the

original configuration of the replaced controller (expansion card or onboard).
Ê Configuration of network settings should be performed by the customer.

8.9 External COM1 connector

8.9.1 Installing the external COM1 connector

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tool: – flat screw driver

– nut driver 5 mm

8.9.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

326 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.9.1.2 Breaking off the COM1 connector

Figure 221: Removing the metal cover

Ê Twist and break off the metal cover. Use a flat screw driver to break off the
metal cover.

8.9.1.3 Installing the COM1 connector

Figure 222: Removing the bolts from the COM1 connector

Ê Remove the two bolts.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 327

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 223: Installing the COM1 connector (A)

Ê Insert the external connector into the slot cover (1).

Ê Connect the connector to the system board (2)

Figure 224: Installing the COM1 connector (B)

Ê Fasten the external serial connector with two bolts.

328 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.9.1.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93

8.9.2 Removing the external COM1 connector

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tool: tool-less

8.9.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 329

Expansion cards and backup units

8.9.2.2 Removing the COM1 connector

Figure 225: Removing the COM1 connector (A)

Ê Remove the two bolts.

Figure 226: Removing the COM1 connector (B)

Ê Remove the external connector from the slot cover (1).

Ê Remove the cable from the system board (2).

330 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Expansion cards and backup units

8.9.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93

8.9.3 Replacing the external COM1 connector

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tool: tool-less

8.9.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

8.9.3.2 Removing the external COM1 connector

Ê "Removing the COM1 connector" on page 330

8.9.3.3 Installing the external COM1 connector

Ê "Installing the COM1 connector" on page 327

8.9.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 331

Expansion cards and backup units

332 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

9 Main memory
Safety notes
V CAUTION!
● Do not install unsupported third party memory modules. For further
information on supported memory modules, refer to section "Basic
information" on page 334.
● Memory modules remain hot after shutdown. Wait for components to
cool down before installing or removing memory modules to prevent
burns.
● Do not insert and remove memory modules repeatedly. Doing so may
cause failures.
● Pressing out the securing clips on the memory slot will eject the
installed memory module. To prevent damage and injuries eject
memory modules carefully without applying excessive force.
● For further information, please refer to chapter "Important
information" on page 45.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 333

Main memory

9.1 Basic information

DIMM 1E
DIMM 2E
DIMM 3E
DIMM 1F
DIMM 2F
DIMM 3F

DIMM 3H
DIMM 2H
DIMM 1H
DIMM 3G
DIMM 2G
DIMM 1G
DIMM 1A
DIMM 2A
DIMM 3A
DIMM 1B
DIMM 2B
DIMM 3B

DIMM 2D DIMM 3D
DIMM 3C DIMM 1D
DIMM 1C DIMM 2C
Figure 227: Memory overview

– The system board is equipped with 24 memory slots

(12 connectors per CPU).
– In mono processor configurations only 12 memory slots are usable.
– The system has to be equipped with at least one memory module per
processor.
– Supported capacities: 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB,16 GB, 32 GB or 64 GB
– Maximum amount of RAM: 1536 GB (768 GB per CPU)
– Supported memory modules:

334 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Main memory

Ranking1 Error
Type
SR DR QR Correction
DDR3-1600 RDIMMs
x x x ECC
PC3-12800 (Registered DIMMs)
1
SR: Single-Rank, DR: Dual-Rank, QR: Quad-Rank

9.1.1 Memory sequence

9.1.1.1 Population rules

– Populate memory slot 1 / channel A (DIMM 1A) first.

– In case of dual processor configurations, populate memory slot
1 / channel D (DIMM 1D) second.
– Within all channels, memory slot 1 must be populated prior to slot 2.
(for all CPUs).
– If memory modules with different ranks are used, always populate the higher
number rank DIMM first (starting from slot 1).
– If memory modules with different capacities are used:
– Populate modules with higher capacities first.
– Within a channel, populate modules in descending order of capacity.
– If memory modules with different speeds are used, the lowest clock rate
applies for all DIMMs.
Regardless of the mode, all DIMMs will run at the highest common
frequency that is allowed by the SPD Data of the DIMMs and the maximum
speed of the selected configuration.
– RDIMMs are allowed.
– Only ECC DIMMs are allowed.
– Mixing of quad-rank DIMMs in one channel and three DIMMs in another
channel (3DPC) on the same CPU is not allowed.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 335

Main memory

9.1.1.2 Independant Channel mode

CPU CPU 1 CPU2

channel A B D C E F H G
DIMM 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G

1 CPU populated

1 1
2 1 2
3 1 3 2
4 1 3 4 2
5 1 5 3 4 2
6 1 5 3 4 2 6
7 1 5 3 7 4 2 6
8 1 5 3 7 4 8 2 6
9* 1 5 9 3 7 4 8 2 6
10* 1 5 9 3 7 4 8 2 6 10
11* 1 5 9 3 7 11 4 8 2 6 10
12* 1 5 9 3 7 11 4 8 12 2 6 10

2 CPUs populated

1 1
2 1 2
3 1 3 2
4 1 3 2 4
5 1 5 3 2 4
6 1 5 3 2 6 4
7 1 5 7 3 2 6 4
8 1 5 7 3 2 6 8 4
9 1 9 5 7 3 2 6 8 4
10 1 9 5 7 3 2 10 6 8 4
11 1 9 5 7 3 11 2 10 6 8 4
12 1 9 5 7 3 11 2 10 6 8 4 12
13 1 9 5 13 7 3 11 2 10 6 8 4 12
14 1 9 5 13 7 3 11 2 10 6 14 8 4 12
15 1 9 5 13 7 15 3 11 2 10 6 14 8 4 12
16 1 9 5 13 7 15 3 11 2 10 6 14 8 16 4 12
17* 1 9 17 5 13 7 15 3 11 2 10 6 14 8 16 4 12
18* 1 9 17 5 13 7 15 3 11 2 10 18 6 14 8 16 4 12
19* 1 9 17 5 13 7 15 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 8 16 4 12
20* 1 9 17 5 13 7 15 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 8 16 4 12 20
21* 1 9 17 5 13 21 7 15 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 8 16 4 12 20
22* 1 9 17 5 13 21 7 15 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 22 8 16 4 12 20
23* 1 9 17 5 13 21 7 15 23 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 22 8 16 4 12 20
24* 1 9 17 5 13 21 7 15 23 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 22 8 16 24 4 12 20

336 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Main memory

9.1.1.3 Mirrored and performance modes

CPU CPU 1 CPU2

channel A B D C E F H G
DIMM 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G
#

1 CPU populated

4 1 1 1 1
8 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
12 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

2 CPUs populated

8 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
12 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 2 2 2 2
16 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
20 1 3 5 1 3 9 1 3 5 1 3 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
24 1 3 5 1 3 9 1 3 5 1 3 5 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6

Notes on Mirrored Channel and Performance modes

– Always populate memory modules in triples.
– Same numbers mean identical modules (capacity, rank).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 337

Main memory

9.1.1.4 Rank Sparing mode

Single-/Dual-Rank RDIMMs

CPU CPU 1 CPU 2

Channel A B D C E F H G
DIMM 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G

# DIMMs Mono CPU configuration

2 1 1
3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1
6 1 1 1 1 1 1
7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

# DIMMs Dual CPU configuration (if all modules are of the same capacity)
4 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1
6 1 1 1 1 1 1
7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
15 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
16 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
17 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
19 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
21 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
22 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
23 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
24 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

338 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Main memory

CPU CPU 1 CPU CPU 2

Ch. A B D C Ch. E F H G
DIMM 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C DIMM 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G

Dual CPU configuration Dual CPU configuration

# #
(if modules are of different capacities) (if modules are of different capacities)
2 1 1 2 2 2
3 1 1 1 3 2 2 2
4 1 1 1 1 4 2 2 2 2
5 1 1 1 1 1 5 2 2 2 2 2
6 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 2 2 2 2 2 2
7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 12 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

I For detailed population rules, refer to section "Notes on Rank Sparing

mode" on page 341.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 339

Main memory

Quad-Rank RDIMMs

CPU CPU 1 CPU 2

Channel A B D C E F H G
DIMM 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G

# DIMMs Mono CPU configuration

1 1
2 1 1
3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1
6 1 1 1 1 1 1
7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

# DIMMs Dual CPU configuration (if all modules are of the same capacity)
1 1
2 1 1
3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1
6 1 1 1 1 1 1
7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
15 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
16 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
17 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
19 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
21 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
22 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
23 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
24 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

340 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Main memory

CPU CPU 1 CPU CPU 2

Ch. A B D C Ch. E F H G
DIMM 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C DIMM 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G

Dual CPU configuration Dual CPU configuration

# #
(if modules are of different capacities) (if modules are of different capacities)
1 1 1 2
2 1 1 2 2 2
3 1 1 1 3 2 2 2
4 1 1 1 1 4 2 2 2 2
5 1 1 1 1 1 5 2 2 2 2 2
6 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 2 2 2 2 2 2
7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 12 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes on Rank Sparing mode

– Same numbers mean identical modules (capacity, rank).
– In case of Single-/Dual-Rank memory configurations, at least two 1R or 2R
modules must be populated per a channel.
– In case of Quad-Rank memory modules, please note the following: Due to
performance reasons, always populate a new channel before installing the
3rd memory slot of a channel.
– Only one memoy module capacity per CPU is allowed.
If two different memory module capacities have been ordered for Rank
Sparing mode, populate them on different CPUs, so that each CPUs only
comprises modules of one capacity.
Example:
12 modules have been ordered, 8 x 4 GB and 4 x 8 GB.
In this case, proceed as follows:
Ê Use the capacity group with more memory modules for CPU 1 and
populate them according to the population sequence for mono CPU
configurations.
Ê Populate the other capacity group on CPU 2 according to the population
rules for mono CPU configurations.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 341

Main memory

– In order to satisfy cooling requirements, populate memory channels on

alternating sides of the processor:

Order CPU 1 CPU 2

1 Channel A Channel E
2 Channel C Channel G
3 Channel B Channel F
4 Channel D Channel H

9.2 Installing memory modules

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: tool-less

9.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

342 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Main memory

9.2.2 Installing a memory module

Ê Identify the correct memory slot see section "Memory sequence" on

page 335.

Figure 228: Installing memory modules (A)

Ê Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory slot.

Figure 229: Installing memory modules (B)

Ê Align the notch on the bottom of the module with the crossbar in the slot.
Ê Press down on the memory module until the securing clips snap into the
cut-outs at each end of the module.

9.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC" on page 83
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Verifying the memory mode" on page 94
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 343

Main memory

9.3 Removing memory modules

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: tool-less

9.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

9.3.2 Removing a memory module

Ê Identify the desired memory slot see section "Memory sequence" on

page 335.
V CAUTION!
Ensure to maintain an operational configuration when removing
memory modules. For additional information, please refer to section
"Basic information" on page 334.

Figure 230: Removing memory modules (A)

Ê Eject the desired memory module by pressing out the securing clips at each
end of the memory slot.

344 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Main memory

Figure 231: Removing memory modules (B)

Ê Remove the ejected memory module.

9.3.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC" on page 83
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

9.4 Replacing memory modules

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

9.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê Identify the defective memory slot using the server management software.
Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 345

Main memory

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59.

Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

9.4.2 Removing the defective memory module

Ê Remove the defective memory module as described in section "Removing a

memory module" on page 344.

9.4.3 Installing a new memory module

Ê Install memory module as described in section "Installing a memory module"

on page 343.

9.4.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC" on page 83
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS" on page 93
Ê "Verifying the memory mode" on page 94
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

346 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

10 Processors
Safety notes
V CAUTION!
● Do not install unsupported processors. For further information on
supported processors, refer to section "Basic information" on
page 348.
● Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and
can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up
(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostatic-
sensitive devices (ESDs).
● Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit
boards by their metallic areas or edges.
● When removing or installing processors, be careful not to touch or
bend the spring contacts on the processor sockets.
● Never touch the underside of the processors. Even minor soiling such
as grease from the skin can impair the processor’s operation or
destroy the processors.
● For further information, please refer to chapter "Important
information" on page 45.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 347

Processors

10.1 Basic information

The system board D3289 offers two sockets for Intel Xeon processors.

10.1.1 Supported processors

– Intel Xeon E5-2600V3 processor series CPUs

– Socket type: LGA 2011 package
– Thermal Design Power (TDP) class: up to 145 W

10.1.2 Processor locations

CPU 2

CPU 1

Figure 232: CPU locations on system board D3289

348 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Processors

10.2 Installing processors

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 15 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tool: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

V CAUTION!
Processors are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge and must
be handled with care. After a processor has been removed from its
protective sleeve or from its socket, place it upside down on a
nonconducting, antistatic surface. Never push a processor over a
surface.

10.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

10.2.2 Installing the processor

I This description applies to the following procedures:

– Installing the second CPU in a mono-processor configuration
– Transfering a CPU after replacing the system board

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 349

Processors

10.2.2.1 Opening the load plate

Figure 233: Opening socket release lever 1

Ê Unlatch the socket release lever 1 by pushing it down and inward (1).
Ê Fully fold back the socket release lever (2).

350 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Processors

Figure 234: Opening socket release lever 2

Ê Unlatch the socket release lever 2 by pushing it down and inward (1).
I Regard the marking on the load plate that should correspond with the
marking on the processor (see circle).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 351

Processors

Figure 235: Opening the load plate (A)

Ê Push down on the first socket release lever 1 to lift the load plate away from
the socket (2).

352 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Processors

Figure 236: Opening the load plate (B)

Ê Fully open the load plate.

V CAUTION!
Be careful not to touch or bend the spring contacts on the processor
socket!
Ê Make sure that the load plate is in the fully open position.
Ê Use a magnifying glass (recommended) to inspect the socket spring
contacts for damages from different angles. Do not use the spare system
board if any irregularities are visible. Possible damages:
– Contact spring is bent backwards upon itself
– Contact spring tip position is shifted or out of alignment
V CAUTION!
Never not try to fix bent contact springs. Doing so may result in loss
of electrical performance and reliability.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 353

Processors

10.2.2.2 Installing the new processor

Figure 237: Opening the load plate (C)

Ê Unlatch the socket release lever 1 by pushing it down an inward (1).

Ê Fold back the socket release lever 1 (2).
Ê Remove the socket cover and save it for future use (3).
V CAUTION!
Always replace the socket cover if you remove the processor from the
socket!

354 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Processors

Figure 238: Installing the processor

Ê Hold the processor with your thumb and index finger.

I Regard the marking on the processor (see circle)!
Ê Lower the processor straight down without tilting or sliding it in the socket.
V CAUTION!
– Ensure that the processor is level in the socket.
– Be careful not to touch or bend the pins on the processor socket.
– Never touch the underside of the processor. Even minor soiling
such as grease from the skin can impair the processor’s operation
or destroy the processor.
– Ensure not to scrape or dent the processor edges.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 355

Processors

10.2.2.3 Closing the load plate

Figure 239: Closing the load plate (A)

Ê Fully fold back the socket release lever 2 (1).

Ê Carefully lower the load plate over the processor(2).

356 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Processors

Figure 240: Closing the load plate (B)

Ê Fully close and hold shut the load plate.

Ê Fold down the socket release lever 2.
I Regard that the socket release lever 2 close the load plate correctly.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 357

Processors

Figure 241: Closing socket release lever 1

Ê Close the socket release lever 2 (1) and latch it under the load plate
retention tab (2) to lock down the load plate.
Ê Fold down the socket release lever 1 (3).

358 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Processors

Figure 242: Closing socket release lever 1

Ê Close the socket release lever 1 (1) and latch it under the load plate
retention tab (2).
Ê If applicable, install the second processor accordingly.

10.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing processor heat sinks" on page 369

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC" on page 83
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 359

Processors

10.3 Removing processors

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 15 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tool: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

10.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing processor heat sinks" on page 373

10.3.2 Removing a processor

I This description applies to the following procedures:

– Removing CPU 2 from a dual-processor configuration
– Removing CPUs from a defective system board
Ê Remove the desired processor heat sink as described in section "Removing
processor heat sinks" on page 373.

360 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Processors

10.3.2.1 Opening the load plate

Figure 243: Opening socket release lever 1

Ê Unlatch the socket release lever 1 (1)by pushing it down and inward (2).
Ê The socket release lever will slightly lift up.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 361

Processors

Figure 244: Opening socket release lever 2

Ê Unlatch the socket release lever 2 (1) by pushing it down and inward (2).
Ê Push down on the first socket release lever 1 to lift the load plate away from
the socket.

362 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Processors

Figure 245: Opening the load plate (A)

Ê Fully open the load plate.

Ê Carefully remove the defective processor from its socket in a vertical motion.
V CAUTION!
Be careful not to touch or bend the spring contacts on the processor
socket.
Ê Thoroughly clean residual thermal paste from the processor surface using a
lint-free cloth.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 363

Processors

Ê Store the processor in a save place for later reuse.

V CAUTION!
Processors are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge and
must be handled with care. After a processor has been removed from
its protective sleeve or from its socket, place it upside down on a
nonconducting, antistatic surface. Never push a processor over a
surface.

10.3.2.2 Closing the load plate

Figure 246: Opening the load plate (B)

Ê Carefully close the load plate over the empty processor socket.
V CAUTION!
Be careful not to touch or bend the spring contacts on the processor
socket.

364 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Processors

10.3.2.3 Installing the protective cover

Figure 247: Attaching the protective socket cover (A)

Ê Fully close and hold shut the load plate.

Ê Close the socket release lever 2 (1) and latch it under the load plate
retention tab to lock down the load plate (2).
I Regard that the socket release lever 2 close the load plate correctly.
Ê Carefully lower the protective socket cover onto the CPU socket in a vertical
motion until it snaps in place (3).
V CAUTION!
Always attach the protective socket cover if you remove the
processor from the socket!
Ê Close release lever 1 (4).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 365

Processors

10.3.2.4 Closing the load plate

Figure 248: Closing socket release lever 1

Ê Close the socket release lever 1 (1) and latch it under the load plate
retention tab (2).

10.3.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê If applicable, "Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC" on
page 83
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

366 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Processors

10.4 Upgrading or replacing processors

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 15 minutes

(FRU) Software: 5 minutes

Tool: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

V CAUTION!
Processors are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge and must
be handled with care. After a processor has been removed from its
protective sleeve or from its socket, place it upside down on a
nonconducting, antistatic surface. Never push a processor over a
surface.

10.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing processor heat sinks" on page 373

10.4.2 Upgrading or replacing a processor

I This description applies to the following procedures:

– Installing the second processor in a single-processor configuration
– Transfering a processor after replacing the system board (see section
"Replacing the system board" on page 534)
– In case of installing a second processor remove the protective cover as
described in section "Opening the load plate" on page 350.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 367

Processors

– Remove the desired processor as described in section "Removing a

processor" on page 360.
– Install the new processor as described in section "Installing the processor"
on page 349.

10.4.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing processor heat sinks" on page 369

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê If applicable, "Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC" on
page 83
Ê If applicable, "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 88
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

368 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Processors

10.5 Handling processor heat sinks

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 15 minutes

(FRU)
if thermal paste is involved
Upgrade and Repair Unit
(URU)

Tool: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

10.5.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59

Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

10.5.2 Installing processor heat sinks

Figure 249: Standard processor heat sink V26898-B1001-V1

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 369

Processors

Figure 250: Standard processor heat sink V26898-B1001-V2

Figure 251: Processor heat sink for GPGPU cards V26898-B1001-V10

370 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Processors

10.5.2.1 Preparing the heat sink and processor

When installing a new heat sink

Figure 252: Removing the protective heat sink cover

Ê Remove the protective cover from the heat sink.

V CAUTION!
Ensure not to touch the heat-conductive paste on the bottom of the
heat sink.

When reusing a heat sink

Ê Ensure that all residual thermal paste has been thoroughly cleaned off the
copper surface of the heat sink.
Ê Apply thermal paste to the processor surface as described in section
"Applying thermal paste" on page 376.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 371

Processors

10.5.2.2 Installing the heat sink

Figure 253: Installing the heat sink

Ê Carefully seat the heat sink on the four threaded holes as shown (see close-
up).
V CAUTION!
– Ensure that the screws on the heat sink are properly seated on the
threaded holes.
– Ensure that the heat sink cooling fins match the direction of the
airflow!
Ê Fasten the four captive screws on the heat sink in a crossover pattern
(screw torque: 1.0 Nm, not applicable for the Japanese market) (1-4).

372 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Processors

10.5.3 Removing processor heat sinks

Figure 254: Removing the processor heat sink (A)

Ê Loosen the four captive screws on the heat sink in a crossover pattern (1-4).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 373

Processors

Figure 255: Removing the processor heat sink (B)

Ê Carefully turn the heat sink back and forth to detach it from the processor (1).
I This may be necessary due to the adhesive quality of the thermal
paste located between the heat sink and processor.
V CAUTION!
Pay special attention not to damage any system board components
surrounding the processor socket.
Ê Lift the heat sink out of the chassis (2).
Ê Thoroughly clean residual thermal paste from the surface of the heat sink
and the processor using a lint-free cloth.

10.5.4 Replacing processor heat sinks

10.5.4.1 Removing the processor heat sink

Ê Remove the processor heat sink as described in section "Removing

processor heat sinks" on page 373.

374 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Processors

10.5.4.2 Applying thermal paste

Ê Apply thermal paste to the processor surface as described in section

"Applying thermal paste" on page 376.
I If the processor upgrade or replacement kit contains a new CPU heat
sink, a thin layer of thermal compound has already been pre-applied
to its lower surface. In this case, please proceed with section
"Installing the heat sink" on page 372.

10.5.4.3 Installing the processor heat sink

Ê Install the processor heat sink as described in sections "Preparing the heat
sink and processor" on page 371 and "Installing the heat sink" on page 372.

10.5.5 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 375

Processors

10.6 Applying thermal paste

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(FRU)

Tool: tool-less

I– For the Japanese market, the service engineer must follow the
instruction provided separately.
– If the processor upgrade or replacement kit contains a new CPU heat
sink, a thin layer of thermal compound has already been pre-applied
to its lower surface. In this case, please proceed with section
"Installing processor heat sinks" on page 369.

Figure 256: Thermal paste syringe TC-5026

One thermal compound syringe (A3C40142460 / 34035576) contains thermal

paste for three processors.

376 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Processors

Figure 257: Applying thermal paste

Ê Apply a dot of thermal paste to the center of the processor surface as shown.
I Two graduation marks on the syringe equal the correct amount of
thermal paste for one processor.
V CAUTION!
Do not mix different types of thermal paste.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 377

Processors

378 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

11 System fan
Safety notes
V CAUTION!
● Do not damage or modify internal cables or devices. Doing so may
cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock.
● Devices and components inside the server remain hot after
shutdown. After shutting down the server, wait for hot components to
cool down before installing or removing internal options.
● Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and
can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up
(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostatic-
sensitive devices (ESDs).
● Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit
boards by their metallic areas or edges.
● If devices are installed or disassembled using methods other than
those outlined in this chapter, the warranty will be invalidated.
● For further information, please refer to chapter "Important
information" on page 45.

11.1 Basic information

The following fans are available:
– five system fan modules included in a system fan box

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 379

System fan

11.2 Replacing the system fan

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: tool-less

11.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Locating the defective component" on page 59

11.2.2 Removing a system fan

Figure 258: Removing a system fan

Ê Take the system fan by the two handles.

Ê Lift the system fan out of the fan box.

380 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System fan

11.2.3 Installing a system fan

Figure 259: Installing a system fan module

Ê Insert the system fan as shown.

Ê Press down on the system fan until it locks.

11.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
I When a system fan module fails, the remaining fans will start operating
at full speed. After the defective fan module has been replaced, all fans
will continue to run at full speed for a couple of minutes, before resetting
to a lower speed.
Ensure that all system fans reset to a normal operating speed.
Ê "Performing a fan test after replacing a defective fan" on page 105

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 381

System fan

11.3 Removing the fan box

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: Phillips PZ2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm

11.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

11.3.2 Removing the fan box

Figure 260: Removing a fan module (A)

Ê Remove the fans 2 and fan 4 as described in section "Removing a system

fan" on page 380.

382 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System fan

Figure 261: Removing the fan box (B)

Ê Remove the two screws at the bottom of the fan box (see circles).
Ê Take the fan box by the green touch points and lift the fan box out of the
chassis.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 383

System fan

11.3.3 Installing the fan box

Figure 262: Installing the fan box (A)

Ê Take the fan box by the green touch points and insert the fan box.
V CAUTION!
Do not pitch the power and OOB cables!

384 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System fan

Figure 263: Installing the fan box (B)

Ê Fasten the fan box with the 2 screws (M3x 6 mm 0.6 Nm) (see circles).
Ê Install the two fan modules see section "Installing a system fan" on
page 381.

11.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 385

System fan

386 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

12 Accessible drives
Safety notes
V CAUTION!
● Before installing an accessible drive, acquaint yourself with the
drive's user documentation.
● When inserting an accessible drive into the server, ensure not to
pinch or strain any connected cables.
● When installing an accessible drive, hold it by its sides. Applying force
to the top of the casing may cause failures.
● When disposing of, transferring, or returning a backup drive, ensure
that all backup media has been removed from the drive.
● Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit
boards by their metallic areas or edges.
● Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and
can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up
(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostatic-
sensitive devices (ESDs).
● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important
information" on page 45.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 387

Accessible drives

12.1 Basic informations

Mounting order for accessible drives in the front panel cage
PRIMERGY RX2540 M1 server offers
– one 5.25-inch accessible drive bays for optical disk drives
– one bay (optional) for a LTO drive or a RDX drive
I LTO drive or RDX drive are not available for 3.5-inch HDD versions.

Figure 264: Accessible drive in front panel module 3.5-inch HDD version

Figure 265: Accessible drives in front panel module 2.5-inch HDD version

1 ODD 2 RDX drive

LTO drive

388 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

12.2 Optical disk drive (ODD) for 3.5-inch

version

12.2.1 Installing the optical disk drive (ODD)

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(URU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

12.2.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382
Ê "Removing the front panel module" on page 441

12.2.1.2 Removing the ODD dummy cover

Figure 266: Removing the ODD dummy module

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 389

Accessible drives

Ê Unlock the ODD dummy cover.

Ê Remove the ODD dummy cover.
V CAUTION!
Save the ODD dummy cover for future use.
Always replace dummy modules into unused drive bays to comply with
applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

12.2.1.3 Installing an ODD

Figure 267: Installing the ODD

Ê Remove the two screws.

Ê Remove the cover plate of the front panel module.
Ê Turn the cover plate of the front panel module upside down.

390 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

Figure 268: Noses in the cover plate of the front panel module

Figure 269: Installing the ODD in the front panel module

Ê Insert the ODD.

Ê Turn the cover plate of the front panel module back.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 391

Accessible drives

Figure 270: Installing the ODD

Ê Install the cover plate of the front panel module.

Ê Fasten the two screws.

Figure 271: Installing the ODD

Ê Connect the power cable to the ODD (1).

Ê Connect the SATA cable to the ODD (2).

392 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

Figure 272: Installing the front panel module (A)

Ê Run the SATA and power cables through the ODD bay opening as shown
(1).
Ê Insert the front panel module (2).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 393

Accessible drives

Figure 273: Installing the front panel module (B)

Ê Route the cables through the openings as shown.

394 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

Figure 274: Installing the cable clamp

Ê Fasten a cable clamp as shown.

12.2.1.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the front panel module" on page 444

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384
Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 395

Accessible drives

12.2.2 Removing the optical disc drive (ODD)

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(URU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

12.2.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê Ask the system administrator to eject all remaining backup or optical media
from the backup or optical disk drive before removing it from the server.
Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382
Ê "Removing the front panel module" on page 441

396 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

12.2.2.2 Removing the ODD

Figure 275: Removing the ODD (A)

Ê Disconnect the SATA cable (2) and the power cable (1).

Figure 276: Removing the cover plate

Ê Remove the two screws.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 397

Accessible drives

Ê Remove the cover plate of the front panel module.

Ê Turn the cover plate of the front panel module upside down.

Figure 277: Removing the ODD latch

Ê Remove ODD.

Figure 278: Installing the dummy cover

Ê Insert the ODD dummy module.

398 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

Figure 279: Installing the cover plate

Ê Install the cover plate of the front panel module.

Ê Fasten the two screws.

12.2.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 399

Accessible drives

12.2.3 Replacing an optical disc drive (ODD)

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(URU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

12.2.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê Ask the system administrator to eject all remaining backup or optical media
from the backup or optical disk drive before removing it from the server.
Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382
Ê "Removing the front panel module" on page 441

12.2.3.2 Removing the defective ODD

Ê "Removing the ODD" on page 397

12.2.3.3 Installing the new ODD

Ê "Installing an ODD" on page 390

12.2.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the front panel module" on page 444

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384
Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

400 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

12.3 Optical disk drive (ODD) for 2.5-inch

version

12.3.1 Installing the optical disk drive (ODD)

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(URU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

12.3.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382
Ê "Removing the front panel cage" on page 465

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 401

Accessible drives

12.3.1.2 Removing the ODD dummy cover

Figure 280: Removing the ODD dummy module

Ê Unlock the ODD dummy cover.

Ê Remove the ODD dummy cover.
V CAUTION!
Save the ODD dummy cover for future use.
Always replace dummy modules into unused drive bays to comply with
applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

402 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

12.3.1.3 Installing an ODD

Figure 281: Remove the ODD latch

Ê Remove the two screws.

Figure 282: Installing the ODD latch

Ê Remove ODD latch from the front panel module.

Ê Turn the ODD latch 180o.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 403

Accessible drives

Ê Attach the ODD latch to rear side of ODD drive.

Figure 283: Fastening the ODD latch

Ê Fasten the ODD latch with two screws (M2 x 4 mm, PH0, 0.2 Nm).

Figure 284: Installing the ODD (A)

Ê Thread front panel cable C1 and USB cable C2 through the bay of the
chassis.
Ê Insert the ODD module.

404 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

Figure 285: Installing the ODD (B)

Ê Press on the latch from topside (see arrow 1), while sliding in the ODD drive,
to make the engagement of ODD latch easier.
Ê Push the ODD latch upward, so that ODD latch is engaged firmly (2).

C3

C5

Figure 286: Installing the front panel module (A)

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 405

Accessible drives

Ê Connect the ODD power cable (C5).

Ê Connect the ODD SATA cable (C3).

12.3.1.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the front panel cage" on page 471

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384
Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

406 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

12.3.2 Removing the optical disc drive (ODD)

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(URU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

12.3.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê Ask the system administrator to eject all remaining backup or optical media
from the backup or optical disk drive before removing it from the server.
Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382
Ê "Removing the front panel cage" on page 465

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 407

Accessible drives

12.3.2.2 Removing the ODD

C3

C5

Figure 287: Removing the cables from the ODD

Ê Disconnect the SATA cable C3 and the power cable C5.

Figure 288: Removing the ODD

Ê Unlock the ODD latch.

408 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

Figure 289: Removing

Ê Remove ODD.

Figure 290: Removing the ODD latch

Ê Remove the two screws.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 409

Accessible drives

Figure 291: Installing ODD latch to the front cage

Ê Turn the ODD latch 180o.

Ê Fasten the ODD latch with two screws (M2 x 4 mm, PH0, 0.2 Nm).

Figure 292: Installing the cover plate

Ê Install the cover plate of the front panel module.

Ê Fasten the two screws.

410 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

12.3.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the front panel cage" on page 471

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384
Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 411

Accessible drives

12.3.3 Replacing an optical disc drive (ODD)

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(URU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

12.3.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê Ask the system administrator to eject all remaining backup or optical media
from the backup or optical disk drive before removing it from the server.
Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382
Ê "Removing the front panel cage" on page 465

12.3.3.2 Removing the defective ODD

Ê "Removing the ODD" on page 397

12.3.3.3 Installing the new ODD

Ê "Installing an ODD" on page 390

12.3.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the front panel cage" on page 471

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384
Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

412 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

12.4 LTO drive only for 2.5-inch version

12.4.1 Installing the LTO drive

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(URU)

Tools: Screw driver PH2

12.4.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 413

Accessible drives

12.4.1.2 Removing the air grid

Figure 293: Removing the air grid

Ê Remove the 4 screws.

I Keep the 4 screws - they will be reused for fixing the LTO drive.
Ê Remove the air grid.
V CAUTION!
Save the dummy cover (air gird) for future use.
Always replace dummy modules into unused drive bays to comply with
applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

414 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

12.4.1.3 Installing an LTO drive

Figure 294: Installing the LTO drive (A)

Ê Push in the LTO drive in the bay.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 415

Accessible drives

Figure 295: Installing the LTO drive (B)

Ê Fasten the LTO drive with 4 screws (M3 x 6mm counter sink, 0.6 Nm).

416 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

Figure 296: Installing the LTO (B)

Ê Thread the cables of the front panel C1, the USB 3.0 (C2) and the ODD (C3,
C5) through the bay, see chapter "Installing the optical disk drive (ODD)" on
page 401.
Ê Carefully slide in the front panel module into its bay.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 417

Accessible drives

Figure 297: Installing the front panel module

Ê Regard that the marked recess in the locking lever is engaged (1).
V CAUTION!
Only for installations with LTO drive:
The front of the front panel is not flat with the housing of the server
because the drive is to long.
Ê Regard that the front panel module is engaged firmly (1).
Ê Fasten the front panel module with a screw (M3 x 6 mm, 0.6 Nm) (2).

418 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

LTO 4/5/6

Figure 298: Connecting the cables to the LTO 4/5/6

Ê Connect the cable C30 to the LTO 4/5/6 drive (1).

Ê Connect the power plug of cable C30 to cable C31 (2).
Ê Connect the SAS plug of cable C30 to the MLC1 connector of the PSAS
controller (3).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 419

Accessible drives

LTO 3

Figure 299: Connecting the cables to the LTO 3

Ê Connect the cable C30 to the LTO 3 drive (1).

Ê Connect the power adapter cable C34 to the LTO 3 drive (2).
I Don't use the power connector of cable C30.
Cable C30 combines power and SAS connector - however its power
connector is not used in this version! (1).Power is supplied to LTO
drive directly with cable C34! (2). Therefore power adapter cable C31
required additionally.
Ê Connect the power cable C34 to the power adapter cable C31 (3).
Ê Connect the power adapter cable C31 to SAS backplane X17.
Ê Connect the end with the SAS connector cable C30 to the MLC1 connector
of the PSAS controller (4).

12.4.1.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67

420 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

12.4.2 Removing the LTO drive

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(URU)

Tools: screw driver PH 2

12.4.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê Ask the system administrator to eject all remaining backup or optical media
from the backup or optical disk drive before removing it from the server.
Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 421

Accessible drives

12.4.2.2 Removing the LTO drive

LTO 4/5/6

Figure 300: Disconnecting the cables

Ê Disconnect the connector (1) and (2).

422 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

LTO 3

Figure 301: Disconnecting the cables

Ê Disconnect the connector (1), (2) and (3).

Figure 302: Removing a LTO drive

Ê Remove the screw.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 423

Accessible drives

Figure 303: Removing the LTO drive

Ê Unlock the front panel cage see section "Removing the front panel cage" on
page 465.
Ê Pull out the front panel cage.

424 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

Figure 304: Removing the LTO drive

Ê Remove the 4 screws.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 425

Accessible drives

Figure 305: Removing the LTO drive

Ê Pull out the LTO drive.

Figure 306: Installing ODD latch to the front cage

Ê Insert the air grid.

Ê Fasten the air grid with 4 screws.

426 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

Ê Install the front panel cage see section "Installing the front panel cage" on
page 471.

12.4.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 427

Accessible drives

12.4.3 Replacing a LTO drive

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(URU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

12.4.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê Ask the system administrator to eject all remaining backup or optical media
from the backup or optical disk drive before removing it from the server.
Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382
Ê "Removing the front panel cage" on page 465

12.4.3.2 Removing the defective LTO drive

Ê "Removing the LTO drive" on page 421

12.4.3.3 Installing the new LTO drive

Ê "Installing the LTO drive" on page 413

12.4.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the front panel cage" on page 471

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384
Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

428 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

12.5 RDX drive only for 2.5-inch version

12.5.1 Installing the RDX drive

"Removing the air grid" on page 414

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(URU)

Tools: Screw driver PH2

12.5.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382
Ê "Removing the front panel cage" on page 465
Ê "Removing the air grid" on page 414

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 429

Accessible drives

12.5.1.2 Preparing an RDX drive

Figure 307: Installing the rails to the RDX drive (A)

Ê Fasten the two rails with each two screws (fillister head screw,M3x 5mm;
PZ2, 0.6 Nm; 4 screws are parts of RDX adapter set) The screws must be
fasten in the middle of the slotted holes.

430 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

Figure 308: Installing the RDX drive (B)

Ê Insert the RDX drive with the bottom upward.

Ê Fasten the 4 screws (Re-use the screws that are used for fixing the air grid
M3 x 6mm, counter sink, 0.6 Nm, C26192-Y10-C111).

12.5.1.3 Installing the front panel cage

Ê "Installing the front panel cage" on page 471

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 431

Accessible drives

Figure 309: Connecting the cables to the RDX drive (A)

Ê Connect the power adapter cable C34 to the connector on the RDX drive (1).
Ê Connect cable C34 to the connector of cable C31 (2).
Ê Connect the power adapter cable C31 to SAS backplane connector X17.

Figure 310: Connecting the cables to the RDX drive (B)

432 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

Ê Connect the USB cable C35 to the USB-A connector of the RDX drive (1).
Ê Connect the USB cable C35 to the connector USB 3.0 INT on the system
board (2).

Figure 311: Connecting the cables to the RDX drive (C)

Ê Insert the cable into cable guidance (middle layer) (1).

Ê Push the cable into the rail (2).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 433

Accessible drives

Figure 312: Connecting the cables to the RDX drive (D)

Ê Route the USB cable as shown.

12.5.1.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

12.5.2 Removing the RDX drive

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(URU)

Tools: screw driver PH 2

434 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

12.5.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê Ask the system administrator to eject all remaining backup or optical media
from the backup or optical disk drive before removing it from the server.
Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

12.5.2.2 Removing the RDX drive

Figure 313: Disconnecting the cables

Ê Disconnect the connector (1) and (2) and (3).

I IF you do not want to replace the RDX drive but remove it, you can
remove the USB cable C35 from the system board and the power
adapter cable C34.

Ê "Removing the front panel cage" on page 465

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 435

Accessible drives

Figure 314: Removing the RDX drive

Ê Remove the 4 screws.

Ê Pull out the RDX drive.

Figure 315: Installing air grid to the front cage

Ê Insert the air grid.

436 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Accessible drives

Ê Fasten the air grid with 4 screws.

Ê "Installing the front panel cage" on page 471

12.5.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 437

Accessible drives

12.5.3 Replacing a RDX drive

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(URU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

12.5.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê Ask the system administrator to eject all remaining backup or optical media
from the backup or optical disk drive before removing it from the server.
Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382
Ê "Removing the front panel cage" on page 465

12.5.3.2 Removing the defective RDX drive

Ê "Removing the RDX drive" on page 434

12.5.3.3 Installing the new RDX drive

Ê "Installing the RDX drive" on page 429

12.5.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the front panel cage" on page 471

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384
Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

438 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

13 Front panel and external front
connectors
Safety notes
V CAUTION!
● When inserting the front panel module into the server, ensure not to
pinch or strain any connected cables.
● Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and
can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up
(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostatic-
sensitive devices (ESDs)
● Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit
boards by their metallic areas or edges.
● For further information, please refer to chapter "Important
information" on page 45.

13.1 Front panel module 3.5-inch versions

13.1.1 Replacing the front panel module

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Note on system information backup / restore

I The front panel module contains the Chassis ID EPROM that contains
system information like server name and model, housing type, serial
number and manufacturing data.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 439

Front panel and external front connectors

To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system

board, a backup copy of important system configuration data is
automatically stored from the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID
EPROM. After replacing the system board the backup data is restored
from the Chassis ID board to the new system board.
V CAUTION!
For that reason the front panel module and system board must not be
replaced simultaneously! In this case, restoring the system configuration
data on the system board would fail.

13.1.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

440 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.1.1.2 Removing the front panel module

Figure 316: Disconnecting the front panel cable

Ê Disconnect the front panel cable from the system board (1).
Ê If applicable, disconnect the front VGA cable from the system board (2).
Ê If applicable, disconnect the front USB3.0 cable from the system board (3).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 441

Front panel and external front connectors

Figure 317: Installing the cable tie

Ê Remove the cable tie,

Ê Push the locking latches upward (see 4 in picture before) to disengage the
locking mechanism.
Ê Carefully push the front panel module out of its bay (see 5 in picture before).
V CAUTION!
Ensure that none of the cables are strained or damaged.

442 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

Figure 318: Removed front panel module

1 Front panel cable

2 Front USB3.0 cable
3 Front VGA card with cable
4 Power ODD cable
5 Data ODD cable

Ê Remove the cable from the desired item.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 443

Front panel and external front connectors

Figure 319: Cable ties

Ê Open the cable tie from the desired item.

13.1.1.3 Installing the front panel module

Figure 320: Cable ties

Ê Fasten the front panel cable and VGA cable (if applicable) each with a cable
tie.

444 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

Figure 321: Installing the front panel module

Ê Connect the front panel cable (1).

Ê If applicable, connect the front USB3.0 cable (2).
Ê If applicable, connect the Front VGA cable (3).
Ê If applicable, connect the data and the power cable (4 and 5).
Ê Insert the front panel module.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 445

Front panel and external front connectors

Figure 322: Installing the front panel module (B)

Ê Route the cables through the openings as shown.

446 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

Figure 323: Installing the cable tie

Ê Fasten a cable tie as shown.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 447

Front panel and external front connectors

Figure 324: Connecting the front panel cable

Ê Connect the front panel cable to the system board (1).

Ê If applicable, connect the front VGA cable from the system board (2).
Ê If applicable, connect the front USB3.0 cable from the system board (3).
Ê Carefully pull the front panel module into its bay and regard that the locking
mechanism snaps in (see circle).
V CAUTION!
Ensure that none of the cables are strained or damaged.

13.1.1.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 85

448 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

Ê Store your server’s system information on the Chassis ID EPROM

integrated into the front panel board. For further information on how to obtain
and use the ChassisId_Prom Tool, refer to section "Using the Chassis ID
Prom Tool" on page 103.
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

13.2 Front panel board 3.5-inch versions

13.2.1 Replacing the front panel board

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: flat screw driver

nut driver 5 mm

Note on system information backup / restore

I The front panel module contains the Chassis ID EPROM that contains
system information like server name and model, housing type, serial
number and manufacturing data.
To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system
board, a backup copy of important system configuration data is
automatically stored from the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID
EPROM. After replacing the system board the backup data is restored
from the Chassis ID board to the new system board.
V CAUTION!
For that reason the front panel module and system board must not be
replaced simultaneously! In this case, restoring the system configuration
data on the system board would fail.

13.2.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 449

Front panel and external front connectors

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

13.2.1.2 Removing the front panel module

Ê "Removing the front panel module" on page 441

13.2.1.3 Removing the front panel board

Figure 325: Removing the front panel board

Ê Disengage the three noses.

Ê Remove the front panel board.

450 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.2.1.4 Installing the front panel board

Figure 326: Installing the front panel board

Ê Insert the front panel board.

13.2.1.5 Installing the front panel module

Ê "Installing the front panel module" on page 444

13.2.1.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 85
Ê Store your server’s system information on the Chassis ID EPROM
integrated into the front panel board. For further information on how to obtain
and use the ChassisId_Prom Tool, refer to section "Using the Chassis ID
Prom Tool" on page 103.
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 451

Front panel and external front connectors

13.3 Front VGA connector 3.5-inch versions

13.3.1 Installing the front VGA connector

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: flat screw driver

13.3.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

13.3.1.2 Removing the front panel module

Ê "Removing the front panel module" on page 441

452 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.3.1.3 Preparing the front panel module

Figure 327: Removing the front VGA cover plate

Ê Insert a flat screw driver to disengage VGA cover plate from the front panel
cover (1).
Ê Remove the VGA cover plate (2).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 453

Front panel and external front connectors

13.3.1.4 Installing the front VGA

Figure 328: Installing the front VGA card

Ê Insert the front VGA card as shown with the longer connector downward.

Figure 329: Mounting the front VGA connector

Ê Fasten the front VGA card with two screws.

13.3.1.5 Installing the front panel module

Ê "Installing the front panel module" on page 444

454 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.3.1.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

13.3.2 Removing the front VGA connector

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: nut screw driver 5 mm

13.3.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

13.3.2.2 Removing the front panel module

Ê "Removing the front panel module" on page 441

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 455

Front panel and external front connectors

13.3.2.3 Removing the front VGA cable

Figure 330: Removing the front VGA card

Ê Remove the two screws of the front VGA card.

Ê Remove the front VGA card.

Figure 331: Installing the front VGA cover plate

Ê Insert the front VGA cover plate.

456 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.3.2.4 Installing the front panel module

Ê "Installing the front panel module" on page 444

13.3.2.5 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

13.3.3 Replacing the front VGA connector

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 15 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

13.3.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

13.3.3.2 Removing the front panel module

Ê "Removing the front panel module" on page 441

13.3.3.3 Removing the front VGA connector

Ê "Removing the front VGA connector" on page 455.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 457

Front panel and external front connectors

13.3.3.4 Installing the new front VGA connector

Ê Install the new front VGA connector as described in section "Installing the
front VGA" on page 454.

13.3.3.5 Installing the front panel module

Ê "Installing the front panel module" on page 444.

13.3.3.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

13.4 Front USB3.0 connector 3.5-inch versions

13.4.1 Installing the front USB3.0 connector

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

13.4.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

458 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

13.4.1.2 Removing the front panel module

Ê "Removing the front panel module" on page 441

13.4.1.3 Preparing the front USB3.0 connector

Figure 332: Sticking the gaskets

Ê Stick the self-adhesive gaskets on the front USB3.0 connector.

Figure 333: Inserting the front USB3.0 connector

Ê Push the front USB3.0 connector into the front panel module.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 459

Front panel and external front connectors

13.4.1.4 Installing the front USB3.0 connector

Figure 334: Fasten the front USB3.0 connector

Ê Fasten the front USB3.0 connector with two screws.

V CAUTION!
Do not fasten the screw too firmly (screw torque 0.4 Nm)!

13.4.1.5 Installing the front panel module

Ê "Installing the front panel module" on page 444

13.4.1.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

460 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.4.2 Removing the front USB3.0 connector

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

13.4.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

13.4.2.2 Removing the front panel module

Ê "Removing the front panel module" on page 441

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 461

Front panel and external front connectors

13.4.2.3 Removing the front USB3.0 connector

Figure 335: Removing the front USB3.0 connector

Ê Remove the two screws.

Ê Disconnect the front USB3.0 connector.

13.4.2.4 Installing the front panel module

Ê "Installing the front panel module" on page 444

13.4.2.5 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

462 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.4.3 Replacing the front USB3.0 connector

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 15 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

13.4.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

13.4.3.2 Removing the front panel module

Ê "Removing the front panel module" on page 441

13.4.3.3 Removing the front USB3.0 connector

Ê "Removing the front USB3.0 connector" on page 462.

13.4.3.4 Installing the new front USB3.0 connector

Ê Install the new front VGA connector as described in section "Installing the
front USB3.0 connector" on page 458.

13.4.3.5 Installing the front panel module

Ê "Installing the front panel module" on page 444.

13.4.3.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 463

Front panel and external front connectors

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

13.5 Front panel module 2.5-inch versions

13.5.1 Replacing the front panel module

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Note on system information backup / restore

I The front panel module contains the Chassis ID EPROM that contains
system information like server name and model, housing type, serial
number and manufacturing data.
To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system
board, a backup copy of important system configuration data is
automatically stored from the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID
EPROM. After replacing the system board the backup data is restored
from the Chassis ID board to the new system board.
V CAUTION!
For that reason the front panel module and system board must not be
replaced simultaneously! In this case, restoring the system configuration
data on the system board would fail.

13.5.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

464 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59

Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

13.5.1.2 Removing the front panel cage

Ê Remove the ID card, see figure 416 on page 566.

Figure 336: Disconnecting the front panel cables

Ê Disconnect the front panel cable from the system board (1).
Ê If applicable, disconnect the front VGA cable from the system board (2).
Ê Disconnect the front USB3.0 cable from the system board (3).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 465

Front panel and external front connectors

Figure 337: Removing the front panel cage (A)

Ê Press down the lever to unlock the front panel cage (1).
Ê Push the front panel cage in the direction of the arrow (2).

Figure 338: Removing the front panel cage (B)

Ê Remove the front panel cage out of its bay.

466 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.5.1.3 Removing the front panel module

Figure 339: Removing the front panel module

Ê Remove the screw (see circle).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 467

Front panel and external front connectors

Figure 340: Removing the front panel module

Ê Push the front panel module in the direction of the arrow.

Ê Take the front panel module out of its bay.

Figure 341: Removed front panel module

468 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

1 Front panel
2 Front VGA
3 Front USB3.0

Ê Remove the cable from the desired item.

Ê If applicable, remove the cable tie.

13.5.1.4 Installing the front panel module

Figure 342: Installing the front panel module

Ê If applicable, connect the front panel cable (1).

Ê If applicable, connect the front VGA cable (2).
Ê If applicable, connect the front USB3.0 cable (3).
Ê If applicable, fasten the front panel cable with two cable ties and VGA cable
one cable tie.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 469

Front panel and external front connectors

V CAUTION!
The cable tie (1) is necessary to avoid that the front panel cable is
disconnected when an ID card is inserted.

Figure 343: Installing the front panel module (B)

Ê Route the cables through the opening as shown.

Ê Insert the front panel module into the front panel cage (see arrow).
Ê Fasten the fully inserted front panel module with one screw (see circle).

470 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.5.1.5 Installing the front panel cage

Figure 344: Installing the front panel cage

Ê Route the cables through the opening.

Ê Insert the front panel cage into the chassis (see arrow).
Ê Insert the ID card, see figure 416 on page 566.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 471

Front panel and external front connectors

Figure 345: Connecting the front panel cables

Ê Connect the front panel cable to the system board (1).

Ê If applicable, connect the front VGA cable from the system board (2).
Ê Connect the front USB3.0 cable from the system board (3).
Ê Carefully pull the front panel module into its bay and regard that the locking
mechanism snaps in (see circle and figure346 / 347).
V CAUTION!
Ensure that none of the cables are strained or damaged.
I The locking mechanism differs for the installations with LTO drives
because the drive need more place, so that an other locking recess point
is needed.

472 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

For Installations with LTO drive

Figure 346: Locking recess point and screw for installations with LTO drive

1 Locking recess point 2 screw to fasten the front panel cage

when a LTO drive is installed.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 473

Front panel and external front connectors

For installations without LTO drive

Figure 347: Locking recess point for installations without LTO drive

13.5.1.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 85
Ê Store your server’s system information on the Chassis ID EPROM
integrated into the front panel board. For further information on how to obtain
and use the ChassisId_Prom Tool, refer to section "Using the Chassis ID
Prom Tool" on page 103.
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

474 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.6 Front panel board 2.5-inch versions

13.6.1 Replacing the front panel board

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: flat screw driver

nut driver 5 mm

Note on system information backup / restore

I The front panel module contains the Chassis ID EPROM that contains
system information like server name and model, housing type, serial
number and manufacturing data.
To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system
board, a backup copy of important system configuration data is
automatically stored from the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID
EPROM. After replacing the system board the backup data is restored
from the Chassis ID board to the new system board.
V CAUTION!
For that reason the front panel module and system board must not be
replaced simultaneously! In this case, restoring the system configuration
data on the system board would fail.

13.6.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 475

Front panel and external front connectors

13.6.1.2 Removing the front panel module

Ê "Removing the front panel cage" on page 465

13.6.1.3 Removing the front panel board

Figure 348: Removing the front panel board

Ê Disengage the four hooks.

Ê Remove the front panel board.

476 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.6.1.4 Installing the front panel board

Figure 349: Installing the front panel board

Ê Insert the front panel board behind the two small hooks on the bottom (see
circles).
Ê Press the front panel board in the direction of the arrow until it snaps in
place.

13.6.1.5 Installing front panel module

Ê "Installing the front panel module" on page 469

13.6.1.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 85

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 477

Front panel and external front connectors

Ê Store your server’s system information on the Chassis ID EPROM

integrated into the front panel board. For further information on how to obtain
and use the ChassisId_Prom Tool, refer to section "Using the Chassis ID
Prom Tool" on page 103.
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

13.7 Front VGA connector 2.5-inch versions

13.7.1 Installing the front VGA connector

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: flat screw driver

nut driver 5 mm

13.7.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

13.7.1.2 Removing the front panel module

Ê "Removing the front panel cage" on page 465

478 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.7.1.3 Preparing the front panel module

Figure 350: Removing the front VGA cover plate

Ê Insert a flat screw driver to disengage VGA cover plate from the front panel
cover (1).
Ê Pull the VGA cover plate out of the front panel module.

13.7.1.4 Installing the front VGA

Figure 351: Installing the front VGA card

Ê Insert the front VGA card as shown with the longer connector downward.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 479

Front panel and external front connectors

Figure 352: Mounting the front VGA connector

Ê Fasten the front VGA card with two screws.

13.7.1.5 Installing the front panel module

Ê "Installing the front panel module" on page 469

13.7.1.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

480 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.7.2 Removing the front VGA connector

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

13.7.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

13.7.2.2 Removing the front panel module

Ê "Removing the front panel cage" on page 465

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 481

Front panel and external front connectors

13.7.2.3 Removing the front VGA cable

Figure 353: Mounting the front VGA connector

Ê Remove the two screws of the front VGA card.

Ê Remove the front VGA card.

Figure 354: Installing the front VGA cover plate

Ê Insert the front VGA cover plate from the front until it snaps in place (see
circle).

482 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.7.2.4 Installing the front panel module

Ê "Installing the front panel module" on page 469

13.7.2.5 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

13.7.3 Replacing the front VGA connector

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 15 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

13.7.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

13.7.3.2 Removing the front panel module

Ê "Removing the front panel cage" on page 465

13.7.3.3 Removing the front VGA connector

Ê "Removing the front VGA connector" on page 481.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 483

Front panel and external front connectors

13.7.3.4 Installing the new front VGA connector

Ê Install the new front VGA connector as described in section "Installing the
front VGA connector" on page 478.

13.7.3.5 Installing the front panel module

Ê "Installing the front panel module" on page 469.

13.7.3.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

13.8 Front USB3.0 connector 2.5-inch versions

13.8.1 Installing the front USB3.0 connector

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

13.8.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

484 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

13.8.1.2 Removing the front panel module

Ê "Removing the front panel cage" on page 465

13.8.1.3 Preparing the front USB3.0 connector

Figure 355: Sticking the gaskets

Ê Stick the self-adhesive gaskets on the front USB3.0 connector.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 485

Front panel and external front connectors

13.8.1.4 Installing the front USB3.0 connector

Figure 356: Installing the front USB3.0 connector

Ê Push the front USB3.0 connector into the front panel module.
Ê Fasten the front USB3.0 connector with two screws (see circles).
V CAUTION!
Do not fasten the screw too firmly (screw torque 0.4 Nm)!

486 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.8.1.5 Installing the front panel module

Ê "Installing the front panel module" on page 469

13.8.1.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

13.8.2 Removing the front USB3.0 connector

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

13.8.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

13.8.2.2 Removing the front panel module

Ê "Removing the front panel cage" on page 465

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 487

Front panel and external front connectors

13.8.2.3 Removing the front USB3.0 connector

Figure 357: Removing the front USB3.0 connector

Ê Remove the two screws (1).

Ê Disconnect the front USB3.0 connector (2).

13.8.2.4 Installing the front panel module

Ê "Installing the front panel module" on page 469

13.8.2.5 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

488 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.8.3 Replacing the front USB3.0 connector

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 15 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: nut driver 5 mm

13.8.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

13.8.3.2 Removing the front panel module

Ê "Removing the front panel cage" on page 465

13.8.3.3 Removing the front USB3.0 connector

Ê "Removing the front USB3.0 connector" on page 488.

13.8.3.4 Installing the new front USB3.0 connector

Ê Install the new front USB3.0 connector as described in section "Installing the
front USB3.0 connector" on page 484.

13.8.3.5 Installing the front panel module

Ê "Installing the front panel module" on page 469.

13.8.3.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 489

Front panel and external front connectors

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

13.9 Front panel module on rack mounting

bracket

13.9.1 Replacing the front panel module on RMB

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: flat screw driver

nut driver 5 mm

Note on system information backup / restore

I The front panel module contains the Chassis ID EPROM that contains
system information like server name and model, housing type, serial
number and manufacturing data.
To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system
board, a backup copy of important system configuration data is
automatically stored from the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID
EPROM. After replacing the system board the backup data is restored
from the Chassis ID board to the new system board.
V CAUTION!
For that reason the front panel module and system board must not be
replaced simultaneously! In this case, restoring the system configuration
data on the system board would fail.

490 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

13.9.1.1 Removing the front panel module from RMB

Figure 358: Disconnecting the front panel cable

Ê Disconnect the front panel cable from the system board.

Figure 359: Removing the screws

Ê Remove the two screws.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 491

Front panel and external front connectors

Figure 360: Removing the front panel module

Ê Carefully pull out the cable.

13.9.1.2 Installing the front panel module on RMB

Figure 361: Connecting the front panel cable to the front panel module

Ê Thread in the cable as shown.

492 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

Figure 362: Installing the front panel to the RMB

Ê Insert the front panel on the RMB.

Figure 363: Inserting the screws

Ê Fasten the front panel with two screws.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 493

Front panel and external front connectors

Figure 364: Connecting the front panel cable

Ê Insert the cable into the connector on the system board (1).
Ê Close the connector (2).

494 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

Figure 365: Connecting front panel cable

Ê Run the front panel cable through the cable clamp as shown.

13.9.1.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 85
Ê Store your server’s system information on the Chassis ID EPROM
integrated into the front panel board. For further information on how to obtain
and use the ChassisId_Prom Tool, refer to section "Using the Chassis ID
Prom Tool" on page 103.
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 495

Front panel and external front connectors

13.9.2 Replacing the ID card holder

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: tool-less

13.9.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê If applicable, "Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 172
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

13.9.2.2 Removing the ID card holder

Ê Remove the ID card, see figure 416 on page 566.

Figure 366: Removing the ID card holder (A)

Ê Press the ID card holder down (1) and push it in the direction of the arrow (2).

496 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Front panel and external front connectors

Figure 367: Removing the ID card holder (B)

Ê Pull the ID card holder out of its place.

13.9.2.3 Installing the ID card holder

Figure 368: Installing the ID card holder

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 497

Front panel and external front connectors

Ê Push the ID card holder into its place.

Ê Insert the ID card, see figure 416 on page 566.

13.9.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê If applicable, "Installing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 169
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

498 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

14 System board and components
Safety notes
V CAUTION!
● Devices and components inside the server remain hot after
shutdown. After shutting down the server, wait for hot components to
cool down before installing or removing internal options.
● Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and
can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up
(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostatic-
sensitive devices (ESDs).
● Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit
boards by their metallic areas or edges.
● For further information, please refer to chapter "Important
information" on page 45.

14.1 Basic information

● CMOS battery
For PRIMERGY RX2540 M1 Server you need a CR2032 battery.
CMOS memory (volatile BIOS memory) and the real-time clock are powered
by a lithium coin cell (CMOS battery). This cell lasts up to ten years,
depending on ambient temperature and use.
If the CMOS battery is depleted or falls below minimum voltage levels, it
need to be replaced immediately.
● UFM (USB Flash Module)
The server can be equipped with a USB Flash Module (UFM).
● TPM (Trusted Platform Module)
The system board is optionally equipped with a Trusted Platform Module
(TPM). This module enables programs from third party manufacturers to
store key information, for example drive encryption using Windows Bitlocker
Drive Encryption.
● DynamicLoM module

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 499

System board and components

14.2 Replacing the CMOS battery

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: tool-less; recommended: tooth pick

Safety notes
V CAUTION!
● The CMOS battery must be replaced with an identical battery or with
a battery type recommended by the manufacturer.
● Keep lithium batteries away from children.
● Do not throw batteries into the trash can. Lithium batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special
waste.
● For further safety information, please refer to section "Environmental
protection" in the operating manual of your server.
● Ensure to insert the CMOS battery with the positive pole facing
up!

14.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

500 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

14.2.2 Removing the battery

Figure 369: Replacing the CMOS battery(e.g)

Ê Press out on the locking spring to eject the depleted CMOS battery (1).
Ê If the CMOS battery cannot be ejected this way, use a toothpick
(recommended) or similar tool as a lever: Insert the toothpick between the
battery and locking spring as shown (2).
V CAUTION!
Do not use sharp-edged tools like screw drivers as they may damage
system board components when slipping.
Ê Carefully pry the depleted CMOS battery out of its socket as shown (3).
Ê Remove the CMOS battery (4).
I Do not throw the CMOS battery into the trash can. Lithium batteries
must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning
special waste.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 501

System board and components

14.2.3 Installing the CMOS battery

Figure 370: Installing the CMOS battery (e.g.)

Ê At a slight angle, fit the new CMOS battery into its socket as shown (1).
V CAUTION!
Ensure to insert the CMOS battery with the positive pole (label side)
facing up as shown (see close-up).
Ê Fold down the CMOS battery (2) until it locks in place.
Ê Ensure that the locking spring (3) is properly engaged.

14.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê Dispose of the CMOS battery in accordance with local regulations

concerning special waste.
Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72

502 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73

Ê "Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 85
Ê "Verifying the system time settings" on page 95

14.3 USB Flash Module (UFM)

This section provides information on how to install, remove or replace the USB
Flash Module (UFM).

14.3.1 Installing the UFM

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(FRU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

14.3.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 503

System board and components

14.3.1.2 Installing the UFM

Figure 371: UFM kit

1 USB Flash Module (UFM) 2 UFM spacer

3 UFM nylon screw

Figure 372: UFM mounting location

1 UFM connector 2 Cut-out for UFM spacer

504 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

Figure 373: Installing the UFM

Ê Connect the UFM to the system board, snapping in the UFM spacer.

14.3.1.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

14.3.1.4 Software configuration

In order to setup the ESXi configuration, the VMware ESXi Recovery Tools CD
is required. An ISO image of the CD is available from the Fujitsu service
partners portal at the following https address:
https://globalpartners.ts.fujitsu.com/com/service/ps/Servers/PRIMERGY/
Pages/default.aspx.
Ê Sign in and choose your PRIMERGY server.
Ê Select the Software & Tools Documentation category.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 505

System board and components

Ê Download the desired ESXi Recovery CD ISO image, listed under Tools.
Ê Unpack and burn the image to a CD.
Ê Ensure that no other USB storage device is connected to the server beside
the UFM.
Ê Insert the Recovery Tools CD into your CD / DVD drive and reboot the
server.
The server should now boot from the Recovery Tools CD.
Ê Follow the on-screen instructions to initiate the installation.
After the flash process is complete, you will be asked to reboot the system.
I For the Japanese market, follow the instructions provided separately.

14.3.2 Removing the UFM

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: Phillips PH0 / (+) No. 0 screw driver

14.3.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

506 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

14.3.2.2 Removing the UFM

Figure 374: Removing the UFM (A)

Ê Remove the nylon screw on the defective UFM.

Ê Disconnect and remove the defective UFM.
Ê The UFM spacer remains on the system board.

14.3.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 507

System board and components

14.3.3 Replacing the UFM

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 10 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: – Phillips PH0 / (+) No. 0 screw driver

– combination pliers and flat nose pliers

14.3.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

14.3.3.2 Removing the UFM

Ê "Removing the UFM" on page 506

Ê The UFM spacer remains on the system board.

508 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

14.3.3.3 Installing the new UFM

Figure 375: Preparing the new UFM

Ê Remove the nylon screw from the new UFM (1).

Ê Remove the UFM spacer (2).

Figure 376: Installing the UFM (B)

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 509

System board and components

Ê Fit the new UFM on the UFM connector and the remaining UFM spacer (1).
Ê Secure the UFM to the UFM spacer with the nylon screw (2).

Destroying the defective UFM

V CAUTION!
The UFM contains customer information (e.g. IP address, license
numbers). After replacing the UFM, hand the defective UFM over to the
customer. If the customer requests disposal of the defective UFM,
proceed as follows:

Figure 377: Destroying the defective UFM

Ê Use a pair of combination pliers (1) and flat nose pliers (2) to break
the UFM in half as shown.

510 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

14.3.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the air duct" on page 67

Ê "Mounting the housing cover" on page 68
Ê "Sliding the server into the rack" on page 71
If the server has been completely removed from the rack for maintenance
purposes, reinstall and secure it in the rack as described in section
"Mounting the server in the rack" on page 69.
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

14.3.3.5 Software configuration

In order to setup the ESXi configuration, the VMware ESXi Recovery Tools CD
is required. An ISO image of the CD is available from the Fujitsu service
partners portal at the following https address:
https://globalpartners.ts.fujitsu.com/com/service/ps/Servers/PRIMERGY/
Pages/default.aspx.
Ê Sign in and choose your PRIMERGY server.
Ê Select the Software & Tools Documentation category.
Ê Download the desired ESXi Recovery CD ISO image, listed under Tools.
Ê Unpack and burn the image to a CD.
Ê Ensure that no other USB storage device is connected to the server beside
the UFM.
Ê Insert the Recovery Tools CD into your CD / DVD drive and reboot the
server.
The server should now boot from the Recovery Tools CD.
Ê Follow the on-screen instructions to initiate the installation.
After the flash process is complete, you will be asked to reboot the system.
I For the Japanese market, follow the instructions provided separately.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 511

System board and components

14.4 Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

14.4.1 Installing the TPM

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU) Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

Installing the TPM:
– Bit screw driver
– TPM bit insert (*)
(* ) For the Japanese market:
– TPM module fixing tool (S26361-F3552-L909)

14.4.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

512 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

14.4.1.2 Installing the TPM

Figure 378: TPM kit

1 TPM (Trusted Platform Module) 3 Special screw for TPM

2 TPM spacer 4 TPM bit insert for TPM special
screw
I The black TPM spacer is
not used in this server.

Figure 379: TPM mounting location

1 TPM connector 2 Cut-out for TPM spacer

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 513

System board and components

Figure 380: Installing the TPM spacer

Ê Snap the TPM spacer into the cut-out in the system board.

Figure 381: TPM bit insert

Ê Attach the TPM bit insert or TPM module fixing tool (Japanese market) to a
bit screw driver.

514 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

Figure 382: Securing the TPM

Ê Connect the new TPM to the system board (1).

Ê Secure the TPM with the TPM screw using the TPM bit insert (2).
I Do not fasten the screw too firmly. Stop as soon as the head of the
screw lightly touches the TPM.

14.4.1.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê Enable TPM in the system board BIOS. Proceed as follows:
Ê Switch on or restart your server.
Ê As soon as the startup screen appears, press the [F2] function key to
enter the BIOS.
Ê Select the Advanced menu.
Ê Select the Trusted Computing submenu.
Ê Set the TPM Support and TPM State settings to Enabled.
Ê Under Pending TPM operation, select the desired TPM operation mode.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 515

System board and components

Ê Save your changes and exit the BIOS.

I For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify
settings, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utilty reference
manual available online at
http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/.
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

516 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

14.4.2 Removing the TPM

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 30 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: Removing the system board:

– Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver / nut driver 5 mm
Removing the TPM:
– flat nose pliers
– thin slotted screw driver (2 x 0.4 mm) *
(* ) For the Japanese market:
– Dedicated TPM screw driver (CWZ8291A)

V CAUTION!
Advise your contact persons that they must provide you with TPM
backup copies. For security reasons, the TPM must be restored/re-
saved by the customer. After installing a new system board, the TPM
must be enabled. You may not clear the TPM data.
If the contact persons DO NOT have a backup copy available, inform
them that replacing the TPM will cause to lose all data.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 517

System board and components

14.4.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê Before removing the TPM, it is necessary to remove BitLocker-protection

from the computer and to decrypt the volume.
Ask the system administrator to turn off BitLocker-protection using the
BitLocker setup wizard available either from the Control Panel or Windows
Explorer:
Ê Open Bitlocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking
Control Panel, clicking Security, and then clicking Bitlocker Drive
Encryption.
I Administrator permission required. If you are prompted for an
administrator password or confirmation, type the password or
provide confirmation.
Ê To turn off BitLocker and decrypt the volume, click Turn Off BitLocker, and
then click Decrypt the volume.
I Decrypting the volume may be time-consuming. By decrypting the
volume, all of the information stored on that computer is decrypted.
For further information on how to disable BitLocker drive encryption,
please refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base.
Fujitsu service partners will find additional information (also available
in Japanese) on the Fujitsu Extranet web pages.
Ê Disable TPM in the system board BIOS. Proceed as follows:
Ê Switch on or restart your server.
Ê As soon as the startup screen appears, press the [F2] function key to
enter the BIOS.
Ê Select the Advanced menu.
Ê Select the Trusted Computing submenu.
Ê Set the TPM Support and TPM State settings to Disabled.

518 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

Ê Save your changes and exit the BIOS.

I For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify
settings, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utilty reference
manual available online at
(http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/.
Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 519

System board and components

14.4.2.2 Removing the TPM

Ê "Removing the defective system board" on page 537.

Ê Lay the system board on a soft, antistatic surface with its component side
facing down.

Figure 383: Removing the TPM screw

Ê Locate the slotted lower end of the TPM screw (1).

Ê Carefully loosen the TPM screw using a thin slotted screw driver (e.g.
watchmaker's screw driver) or the dedicated TPM screw driver (Japanese
market) (2).
V CAUTION!
Ensure to turn the screw clockwise in order to remove it!
Slowly and carefully increase the pressure on the screw until it begins
to turn. The effort when loosing the screw should be as low as
possible.
Otherwise the thin metal bar may break, rendering it impossible to
loosen the screw.
Ê Remove the TPM screw.
Ê Remove the defective TPM on the upper side of the system board.

520 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

Figure 384: Removing the TPM spacer

Ê Using a pair of flat nose pliers, press together the hooks on the TPM spacer
(see close-up) and remove it from the system board.
I If the TPM is to be replaced, the TPM spacer may remain on the
system board.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 521

System board and components

14.4.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73

14.4.3 Replacing the TPM

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 40 minutes

(FRU)

Tools: Removing the system board:

– Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver/ nut driver 5 mm
Replacing the TPM:
– Bit screw driver
– TPM bit insert (*)
– flat nose pliers
– thin slotted screw driver (2 x 0.4 mm) (*)
(* ) For the Japanese market:
– Dedicated TPM screw driver (CWZ8291A)
– TPM module fixing tool (S26361-F3552-L909)

V CAUTION!
Advise your contact persons that they must provide you with TPM
backup copies. For security reasons, the TPM must be restored/re-
saved by the customer. After installing a new system board, the TPM
must be enabled. You may not clear the TPM data.
If the contact persons DO NOT have a backup copy available, inform
them that replacing the TPM will cause to lose all data.

522 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

14.4.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

14.4.3.2 Removing the TPM

Ê "Removing the TPM" on page 517

Ê Leave the TPM spacer on the system board when removing the defective
TPM.

14.4.3.3 Re-installing the TPM

Figure 385: TPM spacer

Ê The TPM spacer is already present on the system board.

Ê "Installing the TPM" on page 512

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 523

System board and components

14.4.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99

14.5 SATA DOM

14.5.1 Installing the SATA DOM

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: tool-less

14.5.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59

Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

524 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

14.5.1.2 Installing the SATA DOM

Figure 386: SATA DOM

Figure 387: Connector SATA6 DOM

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 525

System board and components

Figure 388: Installing the SATA DOM

Ê Connect the SATA DOM in the connector "SATA6 DOM" on the system
board.

14.5.1.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 85

14.5.2 Removing the SATA DOM

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: tool-less

526 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

14.5.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59

Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

14.5.2.2 Removing the SATA DOM

Figure 389: Removing the SATA DOM

Ê Firmly remove the SATA DOM out of its connector.

14.5.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 85

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 527

System board and components

14.5.3 Replacing the SATA DOM

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: tool-less

14.5.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

14.5.3.2 Replacing the SATA DOM

Ê Remove the defective SATA DOM as described in section "Removing the

SATA DOM" on page 527.
Ê Install the new SATA DOM as described in section "Installing the SATA
DOM" on page 525.

14.5.3.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê "Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 85

528 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

14.6 iRMC microSD card

I The iRMC microSD card is necessary for using the Embedded Lifecycle
Management (eLCM) functionality of the iRMC. It requires a valid eLCM
license key, which is always purchased together with the iRMC microSD
card and activated through the iRMC web frontend.
For further information, please refer to the “ServerView embedded
Lifecycle Management (eLCM)” user guide.

14.6.1 Installing the iRMC microSD card

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: tool-less

14.6.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59

Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

14.6.1.2 Installing the iRMC microSD card

Figure 390: iRMC microSD card

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 529

System board and components

Figure 391: Installing the iRMC microSD card

Ê With the label facing up, insert the iRMC microSD card into the microSD
card slot (1) until it locks in place (2).
I The onboard position of the microSD card slot can be found in section
"Connectors and indicators" on page 570.

14.6.1.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73

530 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

14.6.2 Removing the iRMC microSD card

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: tool-less

14.6.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

14.6.2.2 Removing the iRMC microSD card

Figure 392: Removing the iRMC microSD card

Ê To eject the iRMC microSD card, gently push it in and then let go (1).
Ê Pull the iRMC microSD card straight out of its slot (2).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 531

System board and components

Destroying the defective iRMC microSD card

V CAUTION!
The iRMC microSD card contains customer information. After replacing
the iRMC microSD card, hand the defective card over to the customer. If
the customer requests disposal of the defective iRMC microSD card,
proceed as follows:
Ê Using a pair of side-cutting pliers, cut the iRMC microSD card in half.

14.6.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73

532 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

14.6.3 Replacing the iRMC microSD card

Upgrade and Repair Unit Hardware: 5 minutes

(URU)

Tools: tool-less

14.6.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61

14.6.3.2 Replacing the micro SD card

Ê Remove the defective micro SD card as described in section "Removing the

iRMC microSD card" on page 531.
Ê Install the new micro SD card as described in section "Installing the iRMC
microSD card" on page 529.

14.6.3.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 533

System board and components

14.7 Replacing the system board

Field Replaceable Unit Hardware: 50 minutes

(FRU) Software: 10 minutes

Tools: Replacing the system board:

– Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw drive / nut driver 5 mm
– Magnifying glass for inspecting processor socket springs
(recommended)
Replacing the TPM:
– Bit screw driver
– TPM bit insert (*)
– thin slotted screw driver (2 x 0.4 mm) (*)
(* ) For the Japanese market:
– Dedicated TPM screw driver (CWZ8291A)
– TPM module fixing tool (S26361-F3552-L909)
If a UFM is installed:
– Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver
If a DynamicLoM module is installed:
– Phillips PH0 / (+) No. 0 screw driver
– hexagon nut driver 5 mm

Note on TPM
I The system board can be equipped with an optional TPM (Trusted
Platform Module). This module enables third party programs to store key
information (e. g. drive encryption using Windows Bitlocker Drive
Encryption).
If the customer is using TPM functionality, the TPM has to be removed
from the defective system board and connected to the new system
board. For a detailed description, please refer to section "Replacing the
TPM" on page 522.
The TPM is activated in the system BIOS.

534 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

V CAUTION!
– Before replacing the system board, ask the customer whether TPM
functionality is used.
– If the customer is using TPM functionality, remove the TPM from the
old system board and install it on the new system board.
Advise your contact persons that they must provide you with TPM
backup copies. For security reasons, the TPM must be restored / re-
saved by the customer. After installing a new system board the TPM
must be enabled. You may not clear the TPM data.
If the contact persons DO NOT have a backup copy available, inform
them that replacing the TPM will cause to lose all data.

Note on system information backup / restore

I The front panel module contains the Chassis ID EPROM that contains
system information like server name and model, housing type, serial
number and manufacturing data.
To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system
board, a backup copy of important system configuration data is
automatically stored from the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID
EPROM. After replacing the system board the backup data is restored
from the Chassis ID board to the new system board.
V CAUTION!
For that reason the front panel module and system board must not be
replaced simultaneously! In this case, restoring the system configuration
data on the system board would fail.

14.7.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Note on network settings recovery" on page 240

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 57
Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59
Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 535

System board and components

Ê Disconnect all external cables.

Ê Remove the PSUs see, section"Removing a hot-plug power supply unit" on
page 116.
Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 61
Ê "Removing the fan box" on page 382

536 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

14.7.2 Removing the defective system board

Ê Remove all cables from the system board.

Ê Remove the following components from the system board as shown in the
related sections:
– Heat sink: see section "Removing processor heat sinks" on page 373.
I Leave the processor on the defective board for now.
– Memory modules: see section "Removing memory modules" on
page 344.
I Ensure to take note of the memory modules’ mounting positions
for reassembly.
– Expansion cards: see section "Removing expansion cards" on page 237.
I Ensure to take note of the controllers’ mounting positions and
cable connections for reassembly.
– UFM: see section "Removing the UFM" on page 506.
– DynamicLoM: module see section "Removing the DynamicLoM module"
on page 321 or the three screws that are installed in place of the LoM
module.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 537

System board and components

Figure 393: Removing the stabilizer bar

Ê Remove the 5 screws of the stabilizer bar.

Ê Remove the stabilizer bar.

538 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

Figure 394: Detaching the system board

Ê Remove 9 screws from the system board (see circles).

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 539

System board and components

Figure 395: Removing the system board

Ê Slightly lift up the system board by the memory module ejectors and a PCI
slot in order to detach it from the centering bolts (C).
Ê Carefully shift the system board towards the server front until the plug shells
disengage from the cut-outs in the connector panel.
Ê Hold the defective system board by the memory module ejectors and a PCI
slot and at a slight angle lift it out of the chassis.
Ê "Removing the TPM" on page 520
Ê Remove the UFM spacer from the system board.

540 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

14.7.3 Installing the system board

14.7.3.1 Mounting the system board

Figure 396: Installing the system board

Ê Hold the new system board by the memory module ejectors and a PCI slot.
V CAUTION!
– Do not lift or handle the system board by any of its heat sinks!
– Ensure not to damage the EMI springs to comply with applicable
EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements and fire
protection measures.
Ê At a slight angle, lower the system board into the chassis.
Ê Carefully shift the system board towards the server rear until the plug shells
engage with the cut-outs in the connector panel.
Ê Lower the system board onto the centering bolts (C).
Ensure that the system board is properly seated on both centering bolts.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 541

System board and components

Figure 397: Securing the system board

Ê Insert the thee bolts for the DynamicLoM module (if applicable) or the three
screws that are installed in place of the DynamicLoM module (see orange
circles).
Ê Secure the system board with 9 screws (M3 x 6 mm, C26192-Y10-C68) (see
circles).
I Screw torque: 0.6 Nm (not applicable for the Japanese market)
Tighten the screws in a cross diagonal pattern.

542 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

Figure 398: Installing the stabilizer bar

Ê Insert the stabilizer bar.

Ê Fasten the stabilizer bar with the 5 screws.
Ê Verify the settings on the new system board (see figure "Onboard settings"
on page 584).

14.7.3.2 Swapping processors

Preparing the processor socket load plates on the new system board
Ê "Opening the load plate" on page 350

Removing processors from the defective system board

Ê Carefully remove the processors from their sockets on the defective system
board as described in "Removing a processor" on page 360.
V CAUTION!
Remove and reinstall one processor at a time. Do not remove the
second processor from the defective system board until the first
processor has been installed on the new system board.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 543

System board and components

Installing processors on the new system board

Ê "Installing the processor" on page 349.

Installing protective socket covers on the defective system board

I Since the defective system board is sent back for repair, protect the
delicate processor socket springs with a socket cover.
Ê "Opening the load plate" on page 350

14.7.4 Concluding steps

Ê Reconnect all cables to the system board. For a complete cabling overview,
please refer to section "List of used cables" on page 547.
Ê Reinstall all remaining system board components as shown in the related
sections:
– Heat sinks: see section "Installing processor heat sinks" on page 369.
– Memory modules: see section "Installing a memory module" on
page 343.
I Install all memory modules into their original slots.
– Expansion cards: see section "Installing expansion cards" on page 234.
I Install all expansion cards into their original slots.
– UFM: install the UFM spacer to the system board and install the UFM see
section "Installing the UFM" on page 503.
– TPM (if applicable): see section "Installing the TPM" on page 512.
– DynamicLoM module (if applicable) see section "Installing the
DynamicLoM module" on page 317 or the three screws that are installed
in place of the DynamicLoM module.
Ê "Installing the fan box" on page 384
Ê "Reassembling" on page 67
Ê If applicable, activate TPM functionality in the system BIOS under Security >
TPM (Security Chip) Setting > Security Chip. For more information, refer to the
corresponding BIOS Setup Utility Reference Manual.

544 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 System board and components

Ê Install the PSUs, see section "Installing a hot-plug power supply unit" on
page 114.
Ê Reconnect all external cables.
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê "Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC" on page 83
Ê "Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 85
Ê "Configuring LAN teaming" on page 104
Ê "Verifying the system time settings" on page 95
Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 93
Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 99
Ê If applicable, "After replacing the system board" on page 104.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 545

System board and components

546 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

15 Cables
This chapter provides information on how to connect, disconnect and route
cables.

Safety notes
V CAUTION!
● Always hold cables by their connectors when disconnecting them.
Never pull on the cable to disconnect cables.
● Ensure that none of the cables are scraped, strained or otherwise
damaged while replacing system components.
● Immediately replace cables with damaged shielding.
● Always use shielded network cables.

15.1 List of used cables

No Name Cable number Routing

CBL FRONT Front panel board to
C1 T26139-Y4015-V301
PANEL GTL system board
CBL_USB30_65 Front USB3.0 to system
C2 T26139-Y3939-V505
0 board
LTG SATA
C3 T26139-Y4028-V304 ODD to system board
CBL_SATA_850
CBL_FRONT_V
C4 T26139-Y3994-V301 Front VGA to system board
GA
C5 CBL PWR 2CO T26139-Y3986-V302 ODD to SAS BP 1
400
CBL PWR SAS-
C6 T26139-Y3939-V503 SAS BP 1 to system board
BP 660
SAS BP to system board
C71 CBL SMB 1XBP T26139-Y4015-V603
(OOB)
Table 5: List of used cables

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 547

Cables

No Name Cable number Routing

SAS controller to expander
C8 CBL SAS3.0A500 T26139-Y4040-V26
board
CBL
C9 T26139-Y4040-V24 SAS BP 1 to onboard SATA
SAS2.0/3.0A580
CBL RX2520M1
C10 T26139-Y3939-V502 SAS BP 2 to system board
PWR35
C11 CBL SAS3.0A720 T26139-Y4040-V25 SAS controller to SAS BP 2
2
C12 CBL SMB 3XBP T26139-Y4015-V602 system board to SAS BPs
(OOB)
C13 CBL T26139-Y4040-V23 SAS BP 2 to onboard SATA
SAS2.0/3.0A800
C14 CBL FLEXP 22PL T26139-Y4042-V2 OP_ON_EAR to FRONT
600 PANEL2
C15 CBL SAS3.0 500 T26139-Y4040-V38 SAS controller to expander
board
C16 CBL FBU03 250 T26139-Y4031-V101 SAS Controller to FBU1
C17 CBL GPU PWR T26139-Y3946-V702 System board to riser in
320 GTL PCIe slot3/9
C18 CBL COM 150 T26139-Y3589-V408 fixed I/O shield to system
GTL board
C19 CBL SAS3.0 470 T26139-Y4040-V8 SAS controller to 2.5-inch
SAS BP 1
C20 CBL SAS3.0 520 T26139-Y4040-V9 SAS controller to 2.5-inch
SAS BP 1
C21 CBL_SAS30_RA T26139-Y4040-V30 expander board to 2.5-inch
L_150 SAS BP 2
C22 CBL_SAS30_RA T26139-Y4040-V31 expander board to 2.5-inch
L_180 SAS BP 1/BP 3
C23 CBL_SAS30_RA T26139-Y4040-V32 expander board to 2.5-inch
L_210 SAS BP 3
C24 CBL_SAS30_250 T26139-Y4040-V33 expander board to 2.5-inch
_RAL SAS BP 1
Table 5: List of used cables

548 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Cables

No Name Cable number Routing

C25 CBL HOST-BP T26139-Y4040-V10 SAS controller to 2.5-inch
620 SAS BP 2
C26 CBL_PWR_ T26139-Y3959-V353 expander board to 2.5-inch
EXP_150 GTL SAS BP 1
C27 CBL_PWR_6P_4 T26139-Y3939-V206 PCIe SSD rear to system
P_200 GTL board
C28 CBL_4XPCIE_D T26139-Y4040-V40 PCIe controller to PCIe
AL_200 AST SSD rear (bundle) (short)
C29 CBL_SAS3.0_22 T26139-Y4040-V39 SAS controller to SAS HDD
0 AST rear
C30 CBL_SAS_DEV_ T26139-Y4044-V1 SAS controller to LTO
PR_DAL
C31 CBL PWR 3CO T26139-Y3986-V306 LTO to SAS BP
600
C32 CBL FBU03 550 T26139-Y4031-V102 SAS controller to FBU2
C33 CBL_SMB_4XBP T26139-Y4015-V605 4x 2.5-inch SAS BP to
_1330 system board (OOB)
C34 CBL PWR RDX T26139-Y2193-V501 LTO3 power adapter cable
400
C35 CBL USB3.0AN T26139-Y4039-A80 RDX to system board
0,8M
C36 CBL_4XPCIE_65 T26139-Y4040-V45 PCIe controller to PCIe
0 SSD front (bundle) (long)
C37 CBL_PWR_6P_4 T26139-Y3939-V210 PCIe SSD front to system
P_500 board
Table 5: List of used cables
1
Cable C7 will be replaced by cable C33
2 Cable C12will be replaced by cable C33

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 549

Cables

15.2 Cabling plans

15.2.1 3.5-inch variants

15.2.1.1 Configuration 4x 3.5-inch HDD

4x 3.5-inch HDD model with SAS controller

ODD Combo
SB D3289 + 2x USB 3.0

Frontpanel 1 C1 frontpanel

Frontpanel 2 C2 USB 3.0

USB 3.0 Front ODD Data

ODD PWR
SATA 5 C3
Front VGA (opt.)
Front VGA C4

SATA 6 DOM

PWR 12V 4 C17 Opt. PWR for riser in PCIe slot 3

C5
PWR 12V 3 C17 Opt. PWR for riser in PCIe slot 9

For optional
upgrade to 8
SATA 7-10
x 3.5“ config
SATA 1-4

SAS BP1
PWR 12V 2 4 x 3.5“
X17 (ODD-PWR)
PWR 12V 1 C6

X40 (HDD-PWR)
I2C5 P1

C12 P2 X11 (OOB)

SAS3.0
MLC1 X9 (SAS/SATA)
Controller C8
MLC2

FBU

C16
FBU

Figure 399: Cabling - 4x 3.5-inch HDD model with SAS controller

I Cable C12 is only necessary if a controller PSAS CP 400i is installed.

Cable C12 will be replaced by cable C33 in august 2015.

550 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Cables

4x 3.5-inch HDD model (onboard SATA controller)

ODD Combo
SB D3289 + 2x USB 3.0

Frontpanel 1 C1 frontpanel

Frontpanel 2 C2 USB 3.0

ODD Data
USB 3.0 Front

ODD PWR
SATA 5 C3
Front VGA (opt.)
Front VGA C4

SATA 6 DOM

PWR 12V 4 C17 Opt. PWR for riser in PCIe slot 3

C5
PWR 12V 3 C17 Opt. PWR for riser in PCIe slot 9

For optional
upgrade to 8
SATA 7-10
x 3.5“ config
SATA 1-4 C9

SAS BP1
PWR 12V 2 4 x 3.5“
X17 (ODD-PWR)
PWR 12V 1 C6

X40 (HDD-PWR)
I2C5 P1

C12 P2 X11 (OOB)

X9 (SAS/SATA)

Figure 400: Cabling - 4x 3.5-inch HDD model using onboard SATA controller

I Cable C12 will be replaced by cable C33 in august 2015.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 551

Cables

15.2.1.2 Configuration 8x 3.5-inch HDD

8x 3.5-inch HDD model with SAS controller

ODD Combo
SB D3289 + 2x USB 3.0

Frontpanel 1 C1 frontpanel

Frontpanel 2 USB 3.0

USB 3.0 Front C2 ODD Data

ODD PWR
SATA 5 C3
Front VGA (opt.)
Front VGA C4

SATA 6 DOM
C5
SAS BP2
PWR 12V 4 C17 Opt. PWR for riser in PCIe slot 3 4 x 3.5“
X17 (ODD-PWR)

PWR 12V 3 C17 Opt. PWR for riser in PCIe slot 9 X40 (HDD-PWR)

P3 X11 (OOB)
SATA 7-10

SATA 1-4 C11 X9 (SAS/SATA)

PWR 12V 2 C10 SAS BP1

4 x 3.5“
PWR 12V 1 C6
X17 (ODD-PWR)

I2C5 P1
X40 (HDD-PWR)

C12 P2 X11 (OOB)

SAS3.0
MLC1
Controller
MLC2 C8 X9 (SAS/SATA)

FBU

C16
FBU

Figure 401: Cabling - 8x 3.5-inch HDD model with SAS controller

I Cable C12 is only necessary if a controller PSAS CP 400i is installed.

Cable C12 will be replaced by cable C33 in august 2015.

552 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Cables

8x 3.5-inch HDD model (onboard SATA controller)

ODD Combo
SB D3289 + 2x USB 3.0

Frontpanel 1 C1 frontpanel

Frontpanel 2 USB 3.0

USB 3.0 Front C2 ODD Data

ODD PWR
SATA 5 C3

Front VGA (opt.)

Front VGA C4

SATA 6 DOM C5

SAS BP2
4 x 3.5“
PWR 12V 4 C17 Opt. PWR for riser in PCIe slot 3
X17 (ODD-PWR)

PWR 12V 3 C17 Opt. PWR for riser in PCIe slot 9 X40 (HDD-PWR)

P3 X11 (OOB)
SATA 7-10 C13

SATA 1-4
X9 (SAS/SATA)

PWR 12V 2 C10 SAS BP1

4 x 3.5“
PWR 12V 1 C6
X17 (ODD-PWR)
I2C5 P1
X40 (HDD-PWR)

C12 P2 X11 (OOB)

C9 X9 (SAS/SATA)

Figure 402: Cabling - 8x 3.5-inch HDD model using onboard SATA controller

I Cable C12 will be replaced by cable C33 in august 2015.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 553

Cables

15.2.1.3 Configuration 12x 3.5-inch HD

12x 3.5-inch HDD model with SAS controller

SB D3289

Frontpanel 1
OP_on_ear
Frontpanel 2 C14 + 1x USB

USB 3.0 Front

Front VGA

SATA 5
SAS BP
SATA 6 DOM 12 x 3.5“

PWR 12V 4 C10 X41

C10 X40
PWR 12V 3
X42

expander
SATA 7-10
board
SATA 1-4

C7

X32 X32
PWR 12V 2
X31 X31
PWR 12V 1
X30 X30
X1
I2C5

SAS3.0 C15
MLC1
Controller
MLC2 C15

FBU

FBU
C16

Figure 403: Cabling 12x 3.5-inch HDD model with SAS controller

I Cable C7 is only necessary if a controller PSAS CP 400i is installed.

Cable C7 will be replaced by cable C33 in august 2015.

554 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Cables

15.2.2 2.5-inch variants

15.2.2.1 Configuration 8x 2.5-inch HDD

8x 2.5-inch HDD model with onboard SATA controller/ one SAS3.0 RAID
controller

ODD Combo
SB D3289 + 2x USB 3.0

Frontpanel 1 C1 frontpanel

Frontpanel 2 C2 USB 3.0

USB 3.0 Front ODD Data

ODD PWR
SATA 5 C3

Front VGA (opt.)

Front VGA C4

COM1 C18 Opt. fixed in I/O shield

SATA 6 DOM

PWR 12V 4 C17 Opt. PWR for riser in PCIe slot 3

C5

PWR 12V 3 C17 Opt. PWR for riser in PCIe slot 9

SATA 7-10
Onboard SATA option
SATA 1-4

C9

C9 SAS BP1
PWR 12V 2 8 x 2.5“
PWR 12V 1 C6 X17 (ODD-PWR)

X40 (HDD-PWR)
I2C5

C7 X11 (OOB)

SAS3.0
MLC1 C19 X9 (SAS/SATA)
Controller MLC2 C20 X10 (SAS/SATA)

FBU

FBU
C16

Figure 404: Cabling - 8x2.5-inch HDD model with onboard SATA controller and 8x 2.5-inch
HDD model with one SAS3.0 RAID controller

I Cable C7 is only necessary if a controller PSAS CP 400i is installed.

Cable C7 will be replaced by cable C33 in august 2015.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 555

Cables

15.2.2.2 Configuration 16x 2.5-inch HDD

16x2.5-inch model with expander board

ODD Combo
SB D3289 + 2x USB 3.0

Frontpanel 1 C1 frontpanel

Frontpanel 2 C2 USB 3.0

USB 3.0 Front ODD Data

ODD PWR
SATA 5 C3
Front VGA (opt.)
Front VGA

COM1 C18 Opt. fixed in I/O shield

C5
SATA 6 DOM
SAS BP 2
8 x 2.5“
PWR 12V 4 C17 Opt. PWR for riser in PCIe slot 3 X17 (ODD-PWR)

X40 (HDD-PWR)
PWR 12V 3 C17 Opt. PWR for riser in PCIe slot 9
X11 (OOB)
C10
SATA 7-10
X10 (SAS/SATA)
SATA 1-4
expander
board 2.5“ X9 (SAS/SATA)
C21
X15
SAS BP 1
PWR 12V 2 X14 C21 8 x 2.5“
X13
PWR 12V 1 X17 (ODD-PWR)
X12
C6 X40 (HDD-PWR)
I2C5
X11 C22
C12
X10 X11 (OOB)

SAS3.0 (Exp.PWR) X3 C26

MLC1 C8 X1 X10 (SAS/SATA)
Controller
MLC2 C8 X2
C24 X9 (SAS/SATA)

FBU

C16
FBU

Figure 405: 16x 2.5-inch HDD model with expander board

I Cable C12 is only necessary if a controller PSAS CP 400i is installed.

Cable C12 will be replaced by cable C33 in august 2015.

556 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Cables

16x 2.5-inch model with 2 RAID controllers

ODD Combo
SB D3289 + 2x USB 3.0

Frontpanel 1 C1 frontpanel

Frontpanel 2 C2 USB 3.0

USB 3.0 Front ODD Data

ODD PWR
SATA 5 C3
Front VGA (opt.)
Front VGA

COM1 C18 Opt. fixed in I/O shield

C5
SATA 6 DOM
SAS BP 2
8 x 2.5“
PWR 12V 4 C17 Opt. PWR for riser in PCIe slot 3 X17 (ODD-PWR)

X40 (HDD-PWR)
PWR 12V 3 C17 Opt. PWR for riser in PCIe slot 9
X11 (OOB)
C10
SATA 7-10
X10 (SAS/SATA)
SATA 1-4
X9 (SAS/SATA)

SAS BP 1
PWR 12V 2 8 x 2.5“
PWR 12V 1 X17 (ODD-PWR)

C6 X40 (HDD-PWR)
I2C5

C25 C11 X11 (OOB)

SAS3.0 X10 (SAS/SATA)

MLC1
Controller
MLC2 X9 (SAS/SATA)

FBU

PCIe slot 2 C19

C20

SAS3.0
MLC1
Controller
MLC2

FBU

PCIe slot 1 C32

FBU2

C16
FBU1

Figure 406: 16x2.5-inch model with 2 RAID controllers

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 557

Cables

15.2.2.3 Configuration 24x 2.5-inch HDD

SB D3289
OP_on_ear
Frontpanel 1 + 1x USB

Frontpanel 2 C14

USB 3.0 Front SAS BP 3

8 x 2.5“
X17 (ODD-PWR)
SATA 5

C10 X40 (HDD-PWR)

Front VGA

X11 (OOB)
COM1 C18 Opt. fixed in I/O shield
SATA 6 DOM C23 X10 (SAS/SATA)

Opt. PWR for riser X9 (SAS/SATA)

PWR 12V 4 C17
in PCIe slot 3
SAS BP 2
PWR 12V 3 8 x 2.5“
X17 (ODD-PWR)

X40 (HDD-PWR)
SATA 7-10

SATA 1-4
expander C22
board 2.5“ X11 (OOB)
X15
X10 (SAS/SATA)
PWR 12V 2 C10 X14
X9 (SAS/SATA)
X13 C21
PWR 12V 1 C6
X12 C21
SAS BP 1
I2C5 C33 X11 8 x 2.5“
X10
C26 X17 (ODD-PWR)

SAS3.0 X40 (HDD-PWR)

MLC1 C8 X1
Controller
MLC2 C8 X2 (Exp.PWR) X3
X11 (OOB)
FBU C22
X10 (SAS/SATA)

C24 X9 (SAS/SATA)

FBU
C16

Figure 407: 24x 2.5-inch model

I Cable C33 is only necessary if a controller PSAS CP 400i is installed.

558 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Cables

15.2.2.4 Configuration 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD rear

4x2.5"
SB D3289 PCIe SSD rear

PWR 12V 4 C27 X12 (PWR)

D3262 PCIe Ctrl.

P0/X1 P0/X1
P1/X2 Cable bundle with colour P1/X2
P2/X3 P2/X3
marking C28
P3/X4 P3/X4

PCIe slot 8

Figure 408: 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD rear option

15.2.2.5 Configuration 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSD rear

4x 2.5" SAS
SB D3289
HDD/SSD rear
PWR 12V 4 C27 X10 (PWR)

SAS3.0 C29 X5 (SAS HD)

Controller

FBU

PCIe slot 7

C16
FBU

Figure 409: 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD/SSD rear option

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 559

Cables

15.2.2.6 Configuration 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD front

PCIe SSD
SB D3289 4x2.5" front

PWR 12V 2 C37 X12 (PWR)

D3262 PCIe Ctrl.

P0/X1 P0/X1
P1/X2 Cable bundle with colour P1/X2
P2/X3 P2/X3
marking C36
P3/X4 P3/X4

PCIe slot 3

Figure 410: 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD front option

560 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Cables

15.2.2.7 Configuration 8x 2.5-inch HDD / 16x 2.5-inch HDD and LTO 4/5/6
drive

LTO 4/5/6
SB D3289
C30 SAS/PWR)
PWR 12V 4

SAS3.0 ODD Combo

MLC1
Controller + 2x USB 3.0
MLC2

frontpanel

USB 3.0
PCIe slot 2
ODD Data

ODD PWR

Front VGA (opt.)

C31
All other cables as described
in the appropriate
configuration plan SAS BP 1
8 x 2.5“
X17 (ODD-PWR)

X40 (HDD-PWR)

X11 (OOB)

X9 (SAS/SATA)
X10 (SAS/SATA)

Figure 411: 8/16x 2.5-inch and LTO 4/5/6 drive option

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 561

Cables

15.2.2.8 Configuration 8x 2.5-inch HDD / 16x 2.5-inch HDD and LTO 3

drive

LTO 3
SB D3289
C30 SAS
PWR 12V 4
PRW

SAS3.0 ODD Combo

MLC1 C34
Controller + 2x USB 3.0
MLC2

frontpanel

USB 3.0
PCIe slot 2
ODD Data

ODD PWR

Front VGA (opt.)

C31
All other cables as described
in the appropriate
configuration plan SAS BP 1
8 x 2.5“
X17 (ODD-PWR)

X40 (HDD-PWR)

X11 (OOB)

X9 (SAS/SATA)
X10 (SAS/SATA)

Figure 412: 8/16x 2.5-inch and LTO 3 drive option

562 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Cables

15.2.2.9 Configuration 8x 2.5-inch HDD / 16x 2.5-inch HDD and USB 3.0
RDX drive

RDX USB
SB D3289
C35 USB

PRW

ODD Combo
USB 3.0 INT C34
+ 2x USB 3.0

frontpanel

USB 3.0

ODD Data

ODD PWR

Front VGA (opt.)

C31
All other cables as described
in the appropriate
configuration plan SAS BP 1
8 x 2.5“
X17 (ODD-PWR)

X40 (HDD-PWR)

X11 (OOB)

X9 (SAS/SATA)
X10 (SAS/SATA)

Figure 413: 8/16x 2.5-inch and USB 3.0 RDX drive option

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 563

Cables

564 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

16 Appendix

16.1 Mechanical overview

16.1.1 Server front

16.1.1.1 3.5-inch HDD versions

Figure 414: Front side 3.5-inch HDDs (up to 8 HDDs)

Figure 415: Front side 3.5-inch HDDs (up to 12 HDDs)

Pos. Component
1 Front panel module
2 Optical disk drive
3 Space for hard disc drives (depending on the configuration)

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 565

Appendix

16.1.1.2 2.5-inch HDD versions

Figure 416: Front side 2.5-inch HDDs (up to 16 HDDs)

Figure 417: Front side 2.5-inch HDDs (up to 24 HDDs)

Pos. Component
1 Front panel module
2 Space for LTO drive
3 Space for hard disc drives (depending on the configuration)

566 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Appendix

16.1.2 Server rear

Figure 418: PRIMERGY RX2540 M1 rear

Pos. Component
1 Installation location for riser module 2 (optional)
2 COM1 connector (optional)
3 Video connector
4 Management LAN connector
5 Installation location for riser module 1(optional)
6 RAID controller (Slot 1)
7 Optional expansion card (Slot 2-3)
8 DynamicLoM connectors
9 USB3.0
10 USB2.0
11 Optional expansion card (Slot 7-9)
12 Power supply unit 2
13 Power supply unit 1

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 567

Appendix

16.1.3 Server interior

Figure 419: PRIMERGY RX2540 M1 interior (example: 2.5-inch HDD model)

Pos. Component
1 Power supply units
2 Processor 2/ CPU heat sink
3 Memory slots CPU2
4 Front panel module bay
5 HDD / SSD drive bay
6 Fans
7 Memory slots CPU1
8 Processor 1/ CPU heat sink
9 UFM
10 TPM

568 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Appendix

16.2 Configuration tables

16.2.1 Hard disk drives / solid state drives mounting order

Please refer to chapter "Hard disk drives / solid state drives" on page 121.

16.2.2 Memory board configuration table

Please refer to chapter "Main memory" on page 333.

16.2.3 Expansion card configuration table

Please refer to chapter "Expansion cards and backup units" on page 215.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 569

Appendix

16.3 Connectors and indicators

16.3.1 Connectors and indicators on the system board

16.3.1.1 Onboard connectors

USB 3.0 INT PWR 12V 1 PWR 12V 2

Front
USB3.0 Front
PWR 12V 3 Front VGA LCD Front
panel 2
USB INT 1 panel 1
PSU 1
CPU 2 DIMM 1E
CPU 2 DIMM 2E
CPU 2 DIMM 3E
CPU 2 DIMM 1F
CPU 2 DIMM 2F
CPU 2 DIMM 3F

FAN 5

CPU 2 Battery
PSU2
쎻쎻
CPU 2 DIMM 3H
FAN 4
SLOT 9 PCIe x16 Riser 2 Riser 2
CPU 2 DIMM 2H
SLOT 8 PCIe x16 CPU 2 DIMM 1H
CPU 2 DIMM 3G

SLOT 7 PCIe x8 CPU 2 DIMM 2G

CPU 2 DIMM 1G
USB microSD CPU 1 DIMM 1A
1 PWR 12V 4
VGA CPU 1 DIMM 2A
USB COM 1 FAN 3
CPU 1 DIMM 3A
2 iRMC PCH BIOS
Flash CPU 1 DIMM 1B

Management LAN CPU 1 DIMM 2B

USB 3/4 CPU 1 DIMM 3B
SATA6 DOM
external connectors

SATA5

CPU 1 FAN 2
SATA 1-4 SATA 7-10

Dyn LoM
TPM
SLOT 3 PCIe x16 Riser 1 Riser 1 CPU 1 DIMM 3D
INDICATE CPU 1 DIMM 2D PWR ODD
LDL CPU 1 DIMM 1D
SLOT 2 PCIe x8 1
UFM JP1 CPU 1 DIMM 3C
JP2 FAN 1
SLOT 1 (RAID)PCIe x8 CPU 1 DIMM 2C
JP3
HDD LED Intrusion CPU 1 DIMM 1C
I2C5

Figure 420: Internal connectors of system board D3289

570 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Appendix

No. Print Description

1 Front USB Front USB3.0
2 PWR 12V 3 +12 V power rail#3 / multiple usage
3 USB IN 1
4 USB3.0 int
5 Front VGA Front panel VGA connector
6 PWR 12V 1 +12 V power rail#1 / HDD backplane 1
7 PWR 12V 2 +12 V power rail#2 / HDD backplane 2
8 LCD
9 Frontpanel 1 Front panel connector
10 Frontpanel 2 Front panel connector (flat cable)
11 FAN1 - FAN5 FAN connectors
12 OOB
13 SATA 7-10
14 SATA 5
15 SATA 1-4
16 SATA 6 DOM Connector for SATA DOM module
17 UFM Connector for USB Flash Module (UFM)
18 TPM Connector for Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
19 PWR 12V 4 +12 V power rail#4
20 PWR Power supply unit 1 + 2
21 microSD microSD card
22 COM1 Serial interface

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 571

Appendix

16.3.1.2 Onboard indicators and controls

USB 3.0 INT PWR 12V 1 PWR 12V 2

Front
USB3.0 Front
PWR 12V 3 Front VGA LCD Front
panel 2
USB INT 1 panel 1
PSU 1
CPU 2 DIMM 1E
I CPU 2 DIMM 2E
CPU 2 DIMM 3E
K O
CPU 2 DIMM 1F
CPU 2 DIMM 2F
CPU 2 DIMM 3F

H FAN 5

CPU 2 Battery
PSU2
P
C
G

A CPU 2 DIMM 3H
FAN 4
SLOT 9 PCIe x16 Riser 2 Riser 2
CPU 2 DIMM 2H
SLOT 8 PCIe x16 CPU 2 DIMM 1H
F CPU 2 DIMM 3G
CPU 2 DIMM 2G
O
SLOT 7 PCIe x8
CPU 2 DIMM 1G
USB microSD CPU 1 DIMM 1A
1 N PWR 12V 4
VGA CPU 1 DIMM 2A
USB COM 1 FAN 3
CPU 1 DIMM 3A
2 iRMC PCH BIOS
B Flash CPU 1 DIMM 1B

Management LAN CPU 1 DIMM 2B

USB 3/4 CPU 1 DIMM 3B
SATA6 DOM L O
M
H
external connectors

SATA5

CPU 1 FAN 2
SATA 1-4 SATA 7-10
G
Dyn LoM H
TPM O
SLOT 3 PCIe x16 Riser 1 Riser 1 CPU 1 DIMM 3D
INDICATE CPU 1 DIMM 2D PWR ODD
LDL CPU 1 DIMM 1D
SLOT 2 PCIe x8 1
F UFM JP1 CPU 1 DIMM 3C
JP2 FAN 1
SLOT 1 (RAID)PCIe x8 CPU 1 DIMM 2C
JP3
HDD LED Intrusion CPU 1 DIMM 1C
I2C5

Figure 421: Onboard indicators and Indicate CSS button

Component LEDs
I LEDs A, B and C are visible from the outside on the server rear. All other
LEDs are only visible if the top cover has been opened.

572 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Appendix

Indicator Status Description

server has been highlighted using the ID
blue on button on the front panel for easy
identification
A Identification
server has been highlighted using IRMC
blue
(AVR) when local VGA off for easy
flashing
identification
off no critical event (CSS component)
CSS
yellow on prefailure detected (CSS component)
B (Customer Self
Service) yellow
CSS component failure
flashing
off no critical event (non CSS component)
prefailure detected (non CSS
orange on
component)
GEL non CSS component failure
C (Global Error Possible reasons:
LED) orange – sensor reports overheating
flashing – sensor is defective
– CPU error
– software reports an error
F Controller orange on Controller faulty
G CPU orange on CPU faulty
H Memory orange on Memory faulty
I MBC PWR OK green on Power supply ok
K MBC ERROR orange on Power supply error
L Main power green on PWROK
M Standby power yellow on PWROK STBY
green
N iRMC iRMC S4 ok
flashing
O Fan orange on Fan faulty
P Battery orange on Battery faulty

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 573

Appendix

16.3.2 Connectors and indicators on the I/O panel

16.3.2.1 I/O panel connectors

Figure 422: Connection panel on the rear

1 Video connector (blue) 4 2 USB connectors (USB 3.0)

2 Management LAN connector 5 2 USB connectors (USB 2.0)
3 DynamicLoM (optional, different 6 COM1 connector (optional)**
variants)*.

* The LAN connectors on the dynamicLoM modules are numbered in

ascending order from right to left beginning with “0”. The rightmost
connector (LAN 0) is the shared LAN connector respectively.
** The serial interface COM1 can be used as the standard interface or for
communication with iRMC.

574 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Appendix

I Some of the devices that can be connected may require the installation
and setting up of special software (e.g. drivers) (see the documentation
for the connected device).
Depending on BIOS settings, the shared LAN connector may also be used as
a management LAN connector. For further information, please refer to the
corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

16.3.2.2 I/O panel indicators

Global Error, ID and CSS indicators

Figure 423: Global Error, ID and CSS indicators

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 575

Appendix

1 Global Error indicator (yellow) on the system board, visible through

the chassis perforation.
– Lights up yellow if a prefailure event has been detected that
requires (precautionary) service intervention.
– Flashes yellow if an error was detected that requires service
intervention.
– Does not light up if there is no critical event.
If the event is still acute after a power cycle, the indicator is
activated after the restart.
The indicator also lights up in standby mode.
You can find more details on the indicated errors in the System
Event Log (SEL), in the ServerView Operations Manager or via the
iRMC S4's Web interface.
ID indicator (blue) on the system board, visible through the chassis
perforation.
Lights up blue when the system has been selected by pressing the
ID button. To deactivate, press the button again.
The ID indicator can also be activated via the ServerView
Operations Manager and the iRMC S4 Web interface and its status
reported to the ServerView Operations Manager and to the
iRMC S4.
2 CSS indicator (yellow)
– Lights up yellow if a prefailure event was detected for a CSS
component that you can fix yourself (for reasons of precaution)
with the CSS concept.
– Flashes yellow if an error was detected that you can fix
yourself with the CSS concept.
– Does not light up when the system is OK.
If the event is still acute after a power cycle, the indicator is
activated after the restart.

576 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Appendix

LAN indicators

Figure 424: Indicators on the connection panel: LAN indicators (example D3255)

1 LAN Steady green signal when a LAN connection exists.

link/transfer
Remains dark when no LAN connection exists.
Flashes green when LAN transfer takes place.
2 LAN speed Steady yellow signal in the event of a LAN transfer rate
of 1 Gbit/s
Steady green signal in the event of a LAN transfer rate
of 100 Mbit/s.
Remains dark in the event of a LAN transfer rate of
10 Mbit/s.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 577

Appendix

16.3.3 Connectors and indicators on the front panel

16.3.3.1 Connectors on the front panel

3.5-inch HDD versions

Figure 425: Front side connectors 3.5-inch version

2.5-inch HDD versions

Figure 426: Front side connector 2.5-inch version

1 Front VGA 2 USB 3.0

578 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Appendix

16.3.3.2 Front panel controls and indicators

3.5-inch HDD versions

Figure 427: Indicators on the front panel module 3.5-inch HDD

2.5-inch HDD versions

Figure 428: Indicators on the front panel module 2.5-inch HDD

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 579

Appendix

Front panel module on QRL

Figure 429: Indicators on the front panel on QRL

1 Reset button 5 Global Error indicator

2 NMI button 6 HDD activity indicator
3 ID button / ID indicator 7 On/Off button / Power-on indicator
4 CSS indicator 8 Power-off indicator (AC connected)

Status indicators

Pos. Indicator Status Description

server has been highlighted using
ServerView Operations Manager, iRMC
blue on
web frontend or the ID button on the
Identification front panel for easy identification
3
indicator
server has been highlighted using IRMC
blue
(AVR) when local VGA off for easy
flashing
identification
off no critical event (CSS component)
yellow on prefailure detected (CSS component)
4 CSS indicator
yellow
CSS component failure
flashing

580 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Appendix

Pos. Indicator Status Description

off no critical event (non CSS component)
prefailure detected (non CSS
Global error orange on
5 component)
indicator
orange
non CSS component failure
flashing
HDD / SSD
green
6 activity data access in progress
flashing
indicator
is off in the following case:

off – the system is in power-off mode but

connected to the mains (AC
connected)
is on in the following cases:
Power-on
7 – the system has been switched on
indicator green on and is in power-on delay
– the system is powered on and in
normal operation (S0)
flashes
slowly (1/2 iRMC S4 is not ready
Hz)

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 581

Appendix

Pos. Indicator Status Description

is on in the following cases:
– the system is in power-off mode but
connected to the mains (AC
connected)
– the system has been switched on
green on
and is in power-on delay
Power-off I After connecting the server to the
8 indicator (AC mains it takes about 60 seconds
connected) until the server enters the
standby mode.
is off in the following cases:
– the system is not connected to the
off mains
– the system is powered on and in
normal operation (S0)

582 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Appendix

Buttons

Pos. Button Function

This button is used to reboot the system. It can be
pressed using the end of a paper clip.
1 Reset button
V CAUTION!
Risk of data loss!
This button is used to troubleshoot software and
device driver errors. It can be pressed using the end
of a paper clip.
2 NMI button
V CAUTION!
Use this button only if directed to do so by
qualified certified maintenance personnel!
This button highlights the ID indicator on the front and
3 ID button
I/O panels for easy server identification.
This button is used to switch the server on or off.

7 On / Off button I If the system is running an ACPI-compliant

operating system, the pressing the On / Off
button will performs a graceful shutdown.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 583

Appendix

16.4 Onboard settings

USB 3.0 INT PWR 12V 1 PWR 12V 2

Front
USB3.0 Front
PWR 12V 3 Front VGA LCD Front
panel 2
USB INT 1 panel 1
PSU 1
CPU 2 DIMM 1E
CPU 2 DIMM 2E
CPU 2 DIMM 3E
CPU 2 DIMM 1F
CPU 2 DIMM 2F
CPU 2 DIMM 3F

FAN 5

CPU 2 Battery
PSU2

CPU 2 DIMM 3H
FAN 4
SLOT 9 PCIe x16 Riser 2 Riser 2
CPU 2 DIMM 2H
SLOT 8 PCIe x16 CPU 2 DIMM 1H
CPU 2 DIMM 3G

SLOT 7 PCIe x8 CPU 2 DIMM 2G

CPU 2 DIMM 1G
USB microSD CPU 1 DIMM 1A
1 PWR 12V 4
VGA CPU 1 DIMM 2A
USB COM 1 FAN 3
CPU 1 DIMM 3A
2 iRMC PCH BIOS
Flash CPU 1 DIMM 1B

Management LAN CPU 1 DIMM 2B

USB 3/4 CPU 1 DIMM 3B
SATA6 DOM
external connectors

SATA5

CPU 1 FAN 2
SATA 1-4 SATA 7-10

Dyn LoM
TPM
SLOT 3 PCIe x16 Riser 1 Riser 1 CPU 1 DIMM 3D
INDICATE CPU 1 DIMM 2D PWR ODD
LDL CPU 1 DIMM 1D
SLOT 2 PCIe x8 1
UFM JP1 CPU 1 DIMM 3C
JP2 FAN 1
SLOT 1 (RAID)PCIe x8 CPU 1 DIMM 2C
JP3
HDD LED Intrusion CPU 1 DIMM 1C
I2C5

Figure 430: Onboard settings on system board D3289

584 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1

 Appendix

Setting Status Description

Default: Password delete and

Recovery BIOS options disabled

Password skip enabled

JP1 PWD CLR/ This jumper setting will
1 permanently delete the current
JP2 BIOS-RCVR
BIOS password and apply default
BIOS settings.

Recovery BIOS enabled

Default
BIOS Flash
3 JP3
Write Protect
Flash write protect enable

16.5 Minimum startup configuration

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

If the server does not start up or other problems occur, it may be necessary to
take the system down to its most basic configuration in order to isolate the
defective component.

RX2540 M1 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 585

Appendix

The minimum startup configuration consists of the following components and

cables:

Component Notes
System board no TPM, UFM or expansion cards installed
CPU with CPU heat sink
1 memory module installed in DIMM slot 1A
Front panel module
Power supply unit
Table 6: Minimum startup configuration - components

Cable Notes
Front panel cable
Power cable
Table 7: Minimum startup configuration - cables

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 59

Ê "Disconnecting power cords" on page 60
Ê Take the system down to its minimum startup configuration.
Ê "Connecting the server to the power source" on page 72
Ê Connect a keyboard, mouse and display to the server.
Ê "Switching on the server" on page 73
V CAUTION!
Since the fan module is not included in the minimum startup
configuration, the server must be shut down immediately after the
diagnostic process is complete (POST phase has been passed).
The minimum startup configuration must be used exclusively for
diagnostic purposes by maintenance personnel, never in daily
operation!

586 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX2540 M1